Yamaha Clavinova CVP-202 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Pianos digitales
Tipo
El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

Owner’s Manual
IMPORTANT
Check Your Power Supply
Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches
the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom
panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be
provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard
unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage
selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.
To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to
rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage
appears next to the pointer on the panel.
92-469- (bottom)
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-
duce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is ap-
proximately five years. When replacement becomes nec-
essary, contact a qualified service representative to per-
form the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and con-
sult your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-
cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graph-
ics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indi-
cated on this page and those indicated in the safety in-
struction section.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.
The exclamation point within the equi-
lateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important oper-
ating and maintenance (servicing) in-
structions in the literature accompany-
ing the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert the user to the pres-
ence of uninsulated “dangerous volt-
age” within the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient magnitude to con-
stitute a risk of electrical shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic prod-
ucts are tested and approved by an independent safety
testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when
it is properly installed and used in its normal and custom-
ary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated.
DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product per-
formance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
Model _____________________________________
Serial No. __________________________________
Purchase Date ______________________________
3
CVP-202
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the
key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately
and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this
might discolor the panel or keyboard.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do
not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom-
fortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Using the bench (If included)
Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-
ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten
them periodically using the included tool.
Saving data
Internal backed-up data (see page 152) is retained for about 1 week after the
power is turned off. If the period is exceeded, the data will be lost. Be sure to
turn the power switch on for a few minutes at least once a week. The data
could be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data
to a floppy disk (see page 139).
• To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that
you save your important data onto two floppy disks.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use
or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,
short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
have accumulated on it.
Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy
objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,
or roll anything over it.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts.
If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and
have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill
into any openings.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power
switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the
instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-con-
nector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause over-
heating in the outlet.
• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly pro-
cess. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might re-
sult in damage to the instrument or even injury.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme
cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the inter-
nal components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or
radio may generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acciden-
tally fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch
from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly
result in the instrument overheating.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off
the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the
volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening
level.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not
use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wip-
ing cloths.
Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a
finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.
(1)B-7
1
4
CVP-202
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully
so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova. We
also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
Accessories
Music Software Collection Disk (and Music Book)
This disk features sample songs that you can play back on your Clavinova.
Floppy Disk
Use this blank disk to record your performances.
Owner’s Manual
This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova.
Data List
This manual contains lists of voices, styles, and parameters, etc., as well as specifications
and assembly instructions for your Clavinova.
Bench
A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s
manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear
somewhat different from those on your instrument.
Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other
than the purchaser’s personal use is prohibited.
Trademarks:
Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
The Panel Logos
The logos printed on the Clavinova panel indicate standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.
an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most
common format used for MIDI sequence files. The Clavinova is
compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data
using SMF Format 0.)
Disk Orchestra Collection
The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback com-
patibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI
devices.
Style File Format
The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file
format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-
quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of
chord types. The Clavinova uses the SFF internally, reads
optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the
Custom Style feature.
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which
guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play
accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer
from any manufacturer.
XG Format
XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly ex-
pands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with
greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect
capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the
Clavinova’s XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible
song files.
XF Format
The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)
standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability
for the future. The Clavinova is capable of displaying lyrics when
2
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has
license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files,
WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under
relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
5
CVP-202
Features of the Clavinova
Easy-to-use LCD Display
The LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easy-to-understand
control of the Clavinova’s operations (page 16).
Wealth of Rich, Realistic Voices
The CVP-202 has a wide variety of authentic and dynamic voices, including 243 original voices,
480 XG voices, and 14 drum/SFX kits. These include exceptionally natural-sounding piano, strings
and brass voices, and the particularly expressive “SweetTrumpet” voice. Moreover, you can play real-
istic drum and percussion sounds directly from the keyboard (page 31).
Playback of Song Disks
The Clavinova can play back various commercially available song disks. With the appropriate disk
software, you can play the piano part of the song yourself along with a full orchestra or backing band
(page 93). If the software contains lyrics, you can display them on the Clavinova’s LCD.
Special Guide Functions for Easy Learning
With the appropriate disk software, the LCD display and guide lamps help you learn songs by
showing you when and where to play the proper notes. The three-step system helps you to master each
song quickly and easily (page 105).
Fun, Dynamic Automatic Accompaniment
The Auto Accompaniment of the Clavinova gives you full, exciting instrumental backing in your
favorite music styles, according to the chords you play (page 57). There’s even a wide selection of
“Pianist” styles that allow you to enjoy solo piano accompaniment (page 58). Choose from 170 accom-
paniment styles, or create your own custom styles (page 73).
Easy Access to a Variety of Musical Enjoyment
The Clavinova offers several ways to change panel settings without a lot of fuss. You can use the
One Touch Setting feature to select from four sets of voice, effect, and other settings appropriate to
each accompaniment style (page 72). Or access the Music Database to choose from 463 sets of style
and voice settings, selectable by title or style (page 67). You can even save your current setup for in-
stant recall later using the handy Registration function (page 89).
Easy-to-use Recording Features
You can record songs using a variety of methods, depending on your keyboard expertise and prefer-
ence. Choose from the Quick Recording, Track Recording, and Chord Sequence Recording functions
(page 110).
Convenient TO HOST Terminals for Direct Connection to Computers
The Clavinova can be used as a high-quality sound source to play back music software for comput-
ers. It can also be used as a master keyboard, to enter performance data and create music with a com-
puter (page 160).
3
“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with
your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for
any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address:
Clavinova Web site (English only):
http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/
Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments)
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
6
CVP-202
Table of Contents
4
CHAPTER 1:
Getting Ready
About This Manual 8
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks 9
Setting Up the Clavinova 10
Music Rest ....................................................................................... 10
Key Cover ........................................................................................ 10
Turning the Power On and Off ......................................................... 11
Headphones ..................................................................................... 11
Other Connections ........................................................................... 11
Panel Controls and Terminals 12
Playing the Demo Songs 14
CHAPTER 2:
Basic Operation
Using the LCD Display Controls 16
Selecting a Function ........................................................................ 16
Changing a Setting .......................................................................... 17
Changing a Setting in a Menu Display ............................................. 18
Displaying a Different Page ............................................................. 19
Resetting a Function’s Value ........................................................... 19
Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles .................................. 20
Exiting to the Main Display ............................................................... 21
Using the Direct Access Function .................................................... 21
Adjusting the Volume 23
Adjusting the Overall Volume ........................................................... 23
Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume ............................... 23
Setting the Keyboard Volume .......................................................... 23
Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels ............................... 24
Using the Metronome 25
Using the Metronome ....................................................................... 25
Changing the Metronome Settings .................................................. 26
Using the Help Mode 27
CHAPTER 3:
Voices
Selecting Voices 29
Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display ....................... 29
Selecting Voices from the Main Display ........................................... 30
Keyboard Percussion ....................................................................... 31
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice ....................... 31
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode 33
Selecting the Second Voice ............................................................. 33
Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode ........................................... 33
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice ................... 34
Exiting the Dual Mode ...................................................................... 35
Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard
— Split Mode 36
Selecting the Left Voice ................................................................... 36
Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode ........................................... 36
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice ......................... 37
Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously ........................ 39
Exiting the Split Mode ...................................................................... 39
Using the Pedals 40
Damper Pedal (Right) ...................................................................... 40
Sostenuto Pedal (Center) ................................................................ 40
Soft Pedal (Left) ............................................................................... 40
CHAPTER 4:
Reverb and Other Effects
Reverb 41
Turning the Reverb On or Off .......................................................... 41
Changing the Reverb Settings ......................................................... 41
Chorus 44
Changing the Chorus Settings ......................................................... 44
Voice Effects 46
Turning the Effects On ..................................................................... 46
Changing the Effect Settings ........................................................... 46
CHAPTER 5:
Accompaniment Styles
(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)
Selecting Accompaniment Styles 49
Selecting a Style .............................................................................. 49
Playing the Accompaniment Styles 51
Varying the Style .............................................................................. 51
Starting the Accompaniment Style ................................................... 52
Stopping the Accompaniment Style ................................................. 55
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment 57
Using the Auto Accompaniment ....................................................... 57
Starting the Auto Accompaniment ................................................... 58
Stopping the Auto Accompaniment .................................................. 58
Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings .................................. 59
Adjusting Individual Part Levels ....................................................... 65
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions 67
Music Database ............................................................................... 67
Harmony .......................................................................................... 69
One Touch Setting ........................................................................... 72
Creating Your Own Styles 73
Recording a Custom Style ............................................................... 73
Other Custom Style Functions ......................................................... 80
Playing Back Your Custom Styles ................................................... 84
Messages in Custom Style Mode .................................................... 84
Using Style Files 86
About the Yamaha Style File Format ............................................... 86
Loading Styles from a Disk .............................................................. 86
Playing Loaded Style Files ............................................................... 88
7
CVP-202
5
CHAPTER 6:
Registrations
Using Registrations(Registering and Recalling Panel Setups) 89
Storing a Panel Setup ...................................................................... 89
Recalling the Registered Panel Settings .......................................... 90
Protecting Panel Settings ................................................................. 91
CHAPTER 7:
Song Control
Song Playback 93
Song Playback ................................................................................. 93
Part Cancel ...................................................................................... 97
Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment ......
98
Overall Song Playback Volume Control ........................................... 99
Adjustment of Track Settings ......................................................... 100
Changing Settings in the MIXER Display ....................................... 100
Repeat Functions ........................................................................... 101
Other Playback Controls ................................................................ 103
Playing Other Types of Music Data ............................................... 104
Guide Control 105
Guide Methods and Piano Roll ...................................................... 105
Using the Guide Function .............................................................. 106
Other Guide-related Functions ....................................................... 108
Song Recording 110
Recording Setup: Disk Format ....................................................... 111
Quick Recording ............................................................................ 112
Track Recording (Multi-track Recording) ....................................... 115
Adding New Tracks ........................................................................ 118
Punch-in/out Recording ................................................................. 118
Chord Sequence 121
Other Chord Sequence Functions ................................................. 124
Other Record Edit Functions 126
Setup Memory ................................................................................ 126
Song Name .................................................................................... 127
Track Edit ....................................................................................... 128
Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data) ............................................. 130
Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display ................................ 131
Recording Without a Disk 133
About the CVP MEMORY Song ..................................................... 133
CHAPTER 8:
The Utility Functions
Keyboard 136
FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display — page 1 ............................. 136
FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display — page 2 ............................. 137
Pedal 138
FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display — page 3 ........................................ 138
Disk 139
FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display — page 4 ......................................... 139
FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display — page 5 ......................................... 142
FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display — page 6 ......................................... 144
FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display — page 7 ......................................... 145
FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display — page 8 ......................................... 146
MIDI 147
FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display — page 9 ......................................... 147
FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display — page 10 ....................................... 148
FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display — page 11 ....................................... 149
FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display — page 12 ....................................... 150
Backup 152
FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display — page 13 ................................ 152
FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display — page 14 ................................ 153
Utility 154
FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display — page 15 ....................... 154
FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display — page 16 ....................... 155
CHAPTER 9:
Connections
Audio Connections 158
Headphones ................................................................................... 158
Audio Input and Output .................................................................. 158
Data Connections 160
Connecting MIDI Equipment .......................................................... 160
Connecting to a Host Computer ..................................................... 160
APPENDICES
Effect Type Lists 163
Messages 165
Troubleshooting 170
MIDI and Data Compatibility 172
Index 173
8
CVP-202
This section explains the notation conventions that are used
throughout this manual.
Square brackets [ ] ............................................................................................
Square brackets enclose the names of panel buttons,
sliders, and connectors as they appear on your
Clavinova. For example, the DEMO button is expressed
as [DEMO] in this manual.
Bold characters ....................................................................................................
Bold type represents items shown in the LCD display, as well as the cor-
responding LCD buttons (i.e., the buttons directly below, or to the left or
right of, these items). For example, the phrase “Select RIGHT1 VOICE
means that you should press the button directly below the “RIGHT1
VOICE” label at the bottom of the display.
Arrows in Operation Explanations ..................................................
Different types of arrows are used to distinguish the steps of an operation
from its results.
Operation steps
♥ ➾ ♣ …indicates that you should do , then do .
Operation results
♥ ➔ ♠ …indicates that doing results in .
CHAPTER 1: Getting Ready
About This Manual
6
DEMO
HELP
9
CVP-202
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write
Head
......................................................................................
Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument
employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,
after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of
magnetic particles from the disks used that will even-
tually cause read and write errors.
To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order
Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-
available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the
head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer
about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.
Never open or close the key cover while a disk is
extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected position).
The key cover may contact the disk,– possibily dam-
aging the disk or even the disk drive.
Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk
drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk
drive or floppy disks.
About the Floppy Disks ...................................
To handle floppy disks with care:
Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or
apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep
floppy disks in their protective cases when they are
not in use.
Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust
or liquids.
Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the ex-
posed surface of the floppy disk inside.
Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors,
etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely
erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.
Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or
housing.
Do not attach anything other than the provided labels
to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are at-
tached in the proper location.
To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):
To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the
disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open).
Data backup
For maximum data security Yamaha
recommends that you keep two copies of
important data on separate floppy disks.
This gives you a backup if one disk is lost
or damaged. To make a backup disk use
the Disk Copy function on page 142.
Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks .............
To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:
Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing
upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards
the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly
pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the
eject button pops out.
Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks
Precautions
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with
care. Follow the important precautions below.
Compatible Disk Type
3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
D
IS
K
IN
U
S
E
To eject a floppy disk:
Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the
FDD is stopped (check if the [DISK IN USE] lamp is off).
Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk
will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected,
carefully remove it by hand.
D
IS
K
IN
U
S
E
DISK IN USE lamp
Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off
during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can
damage the disk and possibly the disk drive.
If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not
pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject prop-
erly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed
position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only
a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull
out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this
situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the
floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing
the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the
slot and then repeat the eject procedure.
Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive
before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive
for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that
can cause data read and write errors.
7
10
CVP-202
To raise the music rest: ...............................................................................
Z Pull the stand up and toward yourself as far as it will go.
X Flip down the two metal supports at the left and the right on the rear
of the music rest.
C Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.
To lower the music rest: ..............................................................................
Z Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.
X Raise the two metal supports until they are flat against the rear sur-
face of the stand.
C Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down.
CAUTION
Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. Also, when lowering the
stand, let the stand all the way down before releasing it.
To open the key cover:..................................................................................
Z Lift the cover slightly (not too much).
X Slide the cover open.
To close the key cover: .................................................................................
Z Slide the cover toward you.
X Gently lower the cover over the keys.
CAUTION
Hold the cover with both hands when moving it, and do not release it until it is fully
opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others) between the
cover and main unit.
Do not place objects on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover
may fall inside the instrument when the cover is opened, and may be impossible to
remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to
the instrument.
Be careful to avoid catching your
fingers when opening or closing
the cover.
Music Rest
Key Cover
Setting Up the Clavinova
8
11
CVP-202
Z Connect the power cord.
Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the
bottom panel of the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet.
In some areas, a plug adapter may be provided to match the pin con-
figuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.
X Press the [POWER] switch.
The main display appears in the LCD display. (Initially, the voice
GrandPiano 1 and the accompaniment style 60’sGtrPop are
selected.) The power lamp below the lower left end of the keyboard
also lights.
C Adjust the LCD.
If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [CON-
TRAST] knob at the left of the LCD.
V Adjust the volume.
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume to an ap-
propriate level.
When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch
again. Both the LCD display and the power lamp below the left end
of the keyboard will turn off.
Connect a set of stereo headphones (optional) to the [PHONES] jack.
When headphones are connected, the internal speaker system is auto-
matically shut off. Since the Clavinova has two PHONES jacks, two sets
of headphones can be used simultaneously, allowing two people to enjoy
listening to the performance.
Using the Headphone Hanger: ............................................................
A headphone hanger is included in the CVP-202 package so that you
can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger
using the included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure.
CAUTION
Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise,
the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged.
Standard stereo
phone jacks
Your Clavinova is equipped with a variety of jacks and terminals that
let you connect it to other audio and MIDI equipment. These connectors
are located at the left end of the unit on the rear panel.
You can connect other instruments that you want to play through the
Clavinova’s speakers to the AUX IN jacks, or output the Clavinova’s
sound to external speakers using the AUX OUT jacks. Use the MIDI
terminals if you want the Clavinova to control — or be controlled by —
another MIDI instrument. There’s even a TO HOST terminal that lets
you connect the Clavinova directly to a personal computer.
Be sure to turn the power off when connecting or disconnecting other
equipment. See the instructions in Chapter 9 of this manual for details.
Turning the Power On and Off
Headphones
Other Connections
PHONES
THRU
OUT
IN
MIDI
HOST SELECT
MIDI
Mac
PC
-
1
PC
-
2
TO HOSTPEDAL
AUX I N
RR
AUX O UT
L/L
+
RL/L
+
R
Setting Up the Clavinova
9
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
VOLUME
POWER
CONTRAST
PHONES
12
CVP-202
CANCEL
A-1 D0C0B-1 A0G0F0E0
C1 D1 E1 F1
B0
G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3
DEMO
HELP
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAG E
MIXER
FUNCTION
ACMP ON
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
AUTO ACCOMPA NIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FILL
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
21
3
5
6
*
&
w
i
e
r t
8
7
4
9
0 ! @ # $ % ^ ( ) q
y
u o
Panel Controls and Terminals
Volume Section
1 [MASTER VOLUME] ....................................page 23
2 [ACMP/SONG VOLUME ] ............................ page 23
Special Mode Control Section
3 [DEMO] ......................................................... page 14
4 [HELP] .......................................................... page 27
Accompaniment Style Section
5 STYLE buttons ............................................. page 49
6 [DISK/CUSTOM] ........................................... page 73
7 [MUSIC DATABASE].....................................page 67
8 [HARMONY] ................................................. page 69
Auto Accompaniment Section
9 [ACMP ON] ................................................... page 57
0 [INTRO] .........................................................page 54
! [MAIN A] ....................................................... page 51
@ [MAIN B] ....................................................... page 51
# [MAIN C] .......................................................page 51
$ [MAIN D] .......................................................page 51
% [ENDING] ...................................................... page 55
^ [FADE IN/OUT] .....................................pages 55, 56
Metronome Section
& [METRONOME] ............................................page 25
* TEMPO [], [+] ............................................. page 25
Start/Stop Section
( [TAP] ............................................................. page 53
) [SYNCHRO] .................................................. page 53
q [START/STOP] ......................................pages 52, 55
Display Control Section
w [CONTRAST] ................................................ page 11
e [BEAT] lamps ................................................ page 52
r [FUNCTION] ............................................... page 136
t[MIXER] ......................................................... page 24
y LCD display .................................................. page 16
u PAGE [<], [>] ............................................... page 19
i [DIRECT ACCESS] ...................................... page 21
o LCD buttons.................................................. page 18
p [EXIT] ............................................................ page 21
Q Data dial ....................................................... page 17
W [], [+] ............................................................ page 17
Song Control Section
E [SONG] ......................................................... page 94
R [PLAY/STOP] ................................................page 95
T [REC] .......................................................... page 113
Y [PAUSE] ......................................................page 103
U [REW] .........................................................page 103
I [FF] ............................................................. page 103
10
THRU
OUT
IN
MIDI
HOST SELECT
MIDI
Mac
PC
-
1
PC
-
2
TO HOSTPEDAL
AUX IN
RR
AUX OUT
L/L
+
RL/L
+
R
J K
L
: z
x
PHONES
H
13
CVP-202
Panel Controls and Terminals
Guide Control Section
O [EASY PLAY] ..............................................page 105
P [NEXT NOTE] .............................................page 105
a [SOUND REPEAT] .....................................page 106
Voice Section
s VOICE buttons.............................................. page 29
d [DUAL] ..........................................................page 33
f [SPLIT] ..........................................................page 36
g [REVERB] .....................................................page 41
h [EFFECT] ...................................................... page 46
Registration/One Touch Setting Section
j [1] through [4] .......................................pages 72, 90
k [BANK ] ....................................................... page 89
l [BANK +] ....................................................... page 89
; [REGISTRATION] ......................................... page 90
A [ONE TOUCH SETTING] ............................. page 72
S [DISK IN USE] lamp ....................................... page 9
D Floppy disk drive (3.5) .................................. page 9
F [POWER] ...................................................... page 11
G Keyboard guide lamps................................page 109
Connectors
H [PHONES]...................................................page 158
J AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] ....................................page 158
K AUX OUT [L/L+R], [R] ................................page 159
L [PEDAL] .............................. page 34 in the Data List
: MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] ...........................page 160
z [HOST SELECT] ........................................page 160
x [TO HOST] ..................................................page 160
Pedals
c Soft pedal ..................................................... page 40
v Sostenuto pedal ........................................... page 40
b Damper pedal ............................................... page 40
CVP-202
DISK IN USE
F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6
D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7
EXIT
GUIDE CONT ROL
EA SY PL AY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
POWER
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
p W
O P a j k l ;
s
d
A
g
S
F
D
f h
Q
E
Y
U
R
T
I
G
11
c
v
b
14
CVP-202
The Clavinova features a total of 50 demo songs: 4 feature songs,
24 special pieces showcasing the voices, and 22 pieces showcasing
the styles. Listen to them all and hear what the Clavinova can do.
X Select the desired play mode. ............................................................
Select the desired play mode by pressing the rightmost LCD button. The
following three modes are available:
ALL All the songs play back continuously in order, starting from the
selected song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.
RANDOM All the songs play back randomly, starting from the selected
song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.
SINGLE Only the selected song plays back. When the song is finished,
playback stops automatically.
Z Call up the Demo Play mode. ..............................................................
Press [DEMO]. The lamps of the STYLE button and VOICE button
flash continuously, and the DEMO display appears.
C Select the song and start playback..............................................
When you select a song, the demo automatically starts playing in the
selected play mode. There are three ways to select a demo song, as de-
scribed below:
You can also start the demo playback,
beginning with the first feature song, by
pressing [START/STOP] or [PLAY/
STOP].
For a complete list of the Clavinova’s
demo songs, refer to page 7 of the
Data List.
(A) To listen to one of the featured demo songs, press one of
the buttons under the numbers 1 through 4 in the display.
The current song number is highlighted during playback.
Playing the Demo Songs
12
DEMO
HELP
15
CVP-202
(B) To listen to a voice demo, press the VOICE button corre-
sponding to the desired voice category.
Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category.
The lamp of the corresponding VOICE button flashes.
There are two demo songs for each voice
category. To skip to the second song,
press the flashing button a second time.
(C) To listen to a style demo, press the STYLE button cor-
responding to the desired style category.
Playback starts from the first demo song for the selected category.
The lamp of the corresponding STYLE button flashes.
There are two demo songs for each style
category. To skip to the second song,
press the flashing button a second time.
V Adjust the volume. ..........................................................................................
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume.
The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control
cannot be used.
B Stop the demo playback...........................................................................
To change songs during playback:
Press the LCD button, VOICE button, or
STYLE button of another song; the song
then changes. When ALL or RANDOM is
selected as the play mode, the Clavinova
will play other songs when the selected
song is finished.
To stop playback, press either [START/STOP] or [PLAY/STOP], or
the LCD button corresponding to the song that’s currently playing.
N Exit the Demo mode. ....................................................................................
To exit the Demo mode, press [DEMO] again (or press [EXIT]).
Playing Along with the Demo Songs
You can play the keyboard while a demo song is playing back. You
can also change the tempo (page 25) and use the [REW], [FF] and
[PAUSE] buttons. When you play 3. Lyric Demo, the Clavinova will
display the lyrics so you can sing (as well as play) along. Also, you can
use the Guide function (page 105) while the Clavinova is playing 4.
GUIDE Demo. You cannot change the voice selection while the demo is
playing, however.
Demo song data is not output through
the [MIDI OUT] terminal; however, your
keyboard performance data is output.
Playing the Demo Songs
13
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPL I T
REVERB
EFFECT
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
16
CVP-202
You will refer to the LCD display frequently as you operate your
Clavinova. This section consists of a short tutorial that will help
you learn how to read the LCD display and use the related
controls.
Many of the Clavinova’s functions are displayed at the bottom of the
LCD. The main display shown below contains two functions: KBD VOL
and RIGHT1 VOICE. These items are displayed in rounded rectangles,
which means they represent settings that can be changed.
Selecting a Function
Main display
Remember, the
main display
is the dis-
play that appears first when you turn the
power on.
Before you can change a function’s setting, however, you have to select it
first. In the main display, the RIGHT1 VOICE function is highlighted, indi-
cating that this function is currently selected.
Highlighted items
Selected items are
highlighted
(i.e., white
letters on a dark background).
To select a function, press and quickly release the LCD button directly
below that function. For example, you can select KBD VOL by pressing the
leftmost LCD button.
LCD buttons
The five LCD buttons under the LCD
display represent different functions,
depending on the contents of the display.
CHAPTER 2: Basic Operation
Using the LCD Display Controls
14
Press to select.
17
CVP-202
There are several ways to change a function’s value. Here are two of the
main ways:
Using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons.................................
Once you have selected a function, you can change its setting with the
data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons. Since you have just selected KBD
VOL, try turning the dial or pressing the [–] button until it reads 0.
Changing a Setting
You can press the [–] and [+] buttons
repeatedly to change the value a little, or
hold them down to change it quickly.
The KBD VOL function sets the keyboard volume. When you set it to
0, you will find that the keyboard won’t produce any sound, no matter
how high you set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider!
Refer to page 23 for details on the KBD
VOL function.
Using the LCD buttons..................................................................................
You can also increase a setting by simply pressing and holding the
corresponding LCD button. For now, since you’ll want to hear your key-
board later on, press and hold the leftmost LCD button until the value for
KBD VOL is back up to 127.
This is why you should release the LCD
button quickly when you select a func-
tion: you could end up raising its value
when you want to lower it!
Once you’ve got the keyboard volume back where it belongs, you can
learn about a couple of other ways to change settings.
Hold down to increase.
Using the LCD Display Controls
15
18
CVP-202
You can use either of the methods described previously to change the current voice
selection. Just press RIGHT1 VOICE and hold the button down, or use the data dial or
the [+] button to scan through the options. Try listening to a few of the voices while
you’re at it…
Changing a Setting in a Menu Display
Voice
A voice is one of the sounds
the Clavinova uses to make
music.
The problem with this method is that it can be hard to find the voice you’re looking
for — after all, the Clavinova has more than 700 voices! So you’ll probably want to use
a menu display to see what your choices are. Try pressing the [PIANO&HARPSI.]
button now.
When you press one of the VOICE buttons, the LCD displays a new set of
functions listing the voices of that type. You should now be looking at a menu of
piano voices.
Using the LCD buttons .................................................................................................
Each piano voice in this display is listed as a separate function in a rounded rectan-
gle. This means that you can use the LCD buttons to select voices, just like you did to
select the KBD VOL and RIGHT1 VOICE functions at the beginning of this tutorial.
Menu displays
You will use menu displays for
only two purposes: to select a
voice, as shown here, or to
select an accompaniment style
(page 49).
Keep in mind that you can use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select
functions only when viewing a menu display. In other displays, these controls
will change the value of the currently selected function instead.
Try selecting different piano voices in this display before you move on to the
next step.
Using the LCD Display Controls
Refer to page 29 for more
details about selecting voices.
Use the data dial or
[] and [+] buttons to
select a voice.
16
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
PERCUSSION
Using the data dial or [] and [+] buttons ................................................
There is another way to select voices in this display. You can use the data dial
or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the selection. Press [–] or turn the data dial
counterclockwise to select a voice to the left; press [+] or turn the dial clockwise
to select a voice to the right.
Press an LCD button to select the corresponding voice.
19
CVP-202
Using the LCD Display Controls
17
As you were trying out the piano voices in the preceding step, you
may have been surprised to see all the voice names suddenly replaced by
an entirely different set of voices. Specifically, this occurs when you se-
lect the rightmost voice in the display (Midi Grand), then turn the data
dial clockwise or press the [+] button.
Displaying a Different Page
Display pages
Some displays are divided into two or
more pages, indicated by a series of
overlapping boxes in the upper right
corner of the display. The number in the
topmost box is the number of the current
display page.
This happens because the CVP-202 has more piano voices than it can
fit in the display. When one of the Clavinova’s features includes more
functions than will fit in the display, the functions are divided among two
or more display pages. The VOICE SELECT Piano display consists of
two display pages, as shown below:
When a display is divided into pages, you can use PAGE buttons to
change pages. Try it: press the [<] button to see page 1, or the [>] but-
ton to see page 2. Once you have displayed the desired page, you can use
the LCD buttons select a voice in that page as described in the preceding
step.
Refer to page 138 for details about the
functions on the FUNCTION [PEDAL]
display page.
PAG E
Use the PAGE buttons to switch between pages.
After you have changed a function’s value, you may find you want to
restore its basic setting. To demonstrate this, we’ll have to look at another of
the Clavinova’s displays. Press the [FUNCTION] button.
Resetting a Function’s Value
Basic settings
The functions of the Clavinova are set
to certain standard values or standard
conditions when the instrument is
shipped. These settings and conditions
are called the basic settings.
A function’s basic settings are gener-
ally noted in the sidebar together with
the possible settings for that function.
You can also use the Recall function
(page 153) to restore basic settings at
any time.
This button calls up one of the Clavinova’s FUNCTION displays. You
can use this display to tune and transpose the keyboard.
Refer to page 136 for details on the
TUNE and TRANSPOSE functions.
The TUNE function in this display corresponds to two LCD buttons
labeled and . You can use these buttons to tune the keyboard up or
down. Press and hold the button (or use the data dial or the [–] button)
to tune the keyboard down as far as it will go.
MIXER
FUNCTION
20
CVP-202
If you look at the upper right corner of the LCD, you’ll notice that the
FUNCTION display consists of several display pages. Press the PAGE [>]
key once to open the next page, which is titled FUNCTION [KEYBOARD
2]. We’ll use the functions on this page to discuss the next operation.
In addition to the FIXED VELOCITY function, which is selected in this
display, the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] page has two functions in normal
rectangles: KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING. Such functions cannot be
selected; instead, pressing the corresponding LCD button changes the setting
directly without selecting the function.
Using Functions in Non-rounded Rectangles
Using the LCD Display Controls
The FIXED VELOCITY function is de-
scribed on page 137.
18
If you play a few notes, you’ll notice that your Clavinova is flat by quite
a bit. Now, let’s assume that you want to reset the keyboard to the standard
440.0 Hz. You could use the button (or the data dial, or the [
+
] button) to
return the value to its basic setting — but there’s an easier way:
When a function has a basic setting, you can reset it to that value by
pressing both the and buttons (or both the [–] and [+] buttons) simul-
taneously. Try doing this now.
There are some functions whose settings
cannot be returned to the basic value by
pressing the
and
buttons (or [–] and
[+] buttons) simultaneously.
When you’ve got the keyboard back in tune, you’re ready to go on to the
next operation.
21
CVP-202
By pressing the LCD button under KEY TOUCH, for example, you can
set the Clavinova’s response to how hard you play. The value displayed in
the rectangle switches from NORMAL to SOFT, then FIXED, then HARD
— but the FIXED VELOCITY function remains selected.
For more details on the KEY TOUCH
function, refer to page 137.
The VOICE SETTING function determines whether reverb, chorus,
effect, and other settings are automatically selected when a voice is se-
lected. It works a little differently: when you press the LCD button, the
highlighted setting switches between AUTO and MANUAL. Still,
FIXED VELOCITY remains selected.
To exit the current display, press the [EXIT] button.
Exiting to the Main Display
You can usually use [EXIT] to get back to
the main display. In some cases, how-
ever, this button will return you to a previ-
ous setting display instead. When this
happens, pressing [EXIT] again will get
you back to the main display.
The main display should show the name of the last piano voice that you
selected in the VOICE SELECT Piano display.
Using the LCD Display Controls
19
For more details on the VOICE SETTING
function, refer to page 137.
There are other sorts of functions that are displayed in non-rounded
rectangles, like the ones you used to select a demo song in Demo mode
(see page 14). The important thing to remember about these functions is
that you don’t select them, you execute them.
Now we’re ready to return to the main display. First, however, set the
KEY TOUCH and VOICE SETTING functions back to NORMAL and
AUTO, respectively.
EXIT
The last function we need to discuss is Direct Access. The [DIRECT AC-
CESS] button lets you jump directly to pages with particularly useful settings.
When you press [DIRECT ACCESS], the “Press a button to display
corresponding settings” message will appear in the LCD display.
Using the Direct Access Function
DIRECT ACCESS
22
CVP-202
This message will remain onscreen for about three seconds. Press the
button corresponding to the settings you want to display before the mes-
sage disappears.
Here is a list of pages you can access with Direct Access:
You can also press an appropriate button
while holding down the [DIRECT AC-
CESS] button.
A Word about Messages
For ease of operation, the Clavinova displays various messages (like the message displayed by the Direct
Access function as described above) that either prompt you to the next operation, ask for confirmation, or in-
form you that the last operation is not effective, valid, or appropriate. When such messages appear, follow the
instructions as shown. For details about each message, please refer to the “Messages” section on page 165.
[DIRECT ACCESS] plus: Displays: See page:
[HARMONY] HARMONY 69
[ACMP ON]
ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
59
[METRONOME] METRONOME 26
KEYBOARD [RIGHT1]
(1)
31
Any VOICE button KEYBOARD [RIGHT2]
(2)
31
KEYBOARD [LEFT]
(3)
31
[DUAL] KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] 34
[SPLIT] KEYBOARD [LEFT] 37
[REVERB]
(4)
REVERB 41
REVERB DEPTH 43
[EFFECT]
(4)
EFFECT 46
EFFECT DEPTH 48
[REGISTRATION]
REGISTRATION [FREEZE]
91
Saving Your Changes
Now that you’ve started learning how to change the Clavinova’s settings, you may be wondering whether it
will remember the changes you’ve made even after you’ve turned the power off. The answer is yes — but you
need to tell it which settings you want it to remember.
By default, the Clavinova will not remember most of your setting changes. You have two ways to tell it which
settings you want to remember:
You can register your settings with the Registration function (page 89). Once you have registered your
settings, you can restore them at any time by pressing a couple of buttons.
You can instruct the Clavinova to remember certain settings when the power is off, and recall these set-
tings when you turn the power back on. To do this, you need to change the settings of the Backup function
(page 152).
Using the LCD Display Controls
(1)
When RIGHT1 VOICE is selected in
the main display.
(2)
When RIGHT2 VOICE is selected in
the main display.
(3)
When LEFT VOICE is selected in the
main display.
(4)
Selects whichever page was most
recently displayed.
20
23
CVP-202
The Clavinova has two sliders that let you adjust the overall volume
and the accompaniment or song playback volume. There are also
settings that you can use to adjust the keyboard volume and the
volume of each part of the automatic accompaniment or song.
Adjusting the Overall Volume
Use the [MASTER VOLUME]
slider to set the overall volume of
the Clavinova.
The [MASTER VOLUME] slider also
determines the output level of the
signal at the [PHONES] jack.
Signals input to the AUX IN jacks are
also affected by the [MASTER VOL-
UME] setting; however, signals output
via the AUX OUT jacks are not.
Use the [ACMP/SONG VOL-
UME] slider to set the playback
volume of the automatic accompa-
niment and songs.
Adjusting the Accompaniment or Song Volume
This control has no effect on the volume
of your keyboard performance.
Select KBD VOL in the main
display, then use the data dial or
the [–] and [+] buttons to change
the keyboard volume.
Setting the Keyboard Volume
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
VOLUME
Adjusting the Volume
21
24
CVP-202
Call up the MIXER display by pressing [MIXER]. In the Mixer display,
the volume of Automatic Accompaniment and individual parts of a song can
be adjusted. Press [MIXER] again (or [EXIT]) to return to the previous
display.
There are two types of mixer display, as shown below.
Automatic Accompaniment Mixer
This MIXER display appears when you’re not using the Song mode.
See “Adjusting Individual Part Levels” (page 65) for details.
Adjusting Accompaniment or Song Part Levels
Song Mixer
This MIXER display appears in the Song mode. See “Adjusting Indi-
vidual Track Levels” (page 100) for details.
Adjusting the Volume
22
25
CVP-202
The Clavinova features a convenient metronome that is ideal for practicing. The
procedure for setting the metronome tempo can also be used to set the playback
tempo for the Auto Accompaniment (page 49) and Song (page 93) modes.
You can start the metronome and set the tempo from any display, including
the main display.
Starting and Stopping the Metronome .......................................
Using the Metronome
The metronome can also be used
during playback in Auto Accompa-
niment (page 49) or Song mode
(page 93).
The metronome cannot be used
when playing disk software that
was recorded in free-tempo (see
page 96).
To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button.
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME R ESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
METRONOME
The [METRONOME] lamp lights, and the metronome starts keeping
time (indicated by the flashing of the BEAT lamps).
Tempo
Range: 32 — 280
Basic setting: Depends on style.
The tempo indication in the main display is highlighted, and the
tempo changes.
Slower Faster
Restoring the Basic Tempo
You can restore the preset tempo for
the currently selected style by simul-
taneously pressing both TEMPO [–]
and [+] buttons.
You can either press TEMPO [–] or [+] buttons briefly to change the
tempo value by one, or hold down the button to change it continuously.
When the tempo is highlighted in the display, you can also use the data
dial or [–] and [+] buttons to set the tempo.
Using the Metronome
During Style or Song Playback
If a style or song is started while the
metronome is playing, the metro-
nome will continue to sound along
with the style or song.
The metronome uses the time signa-
ture of the style or song instead of
the BEAT setting during style or
song playback.
The metronome stops when the
style or song stops.
23
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
CONTRAST
BEAT
Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome.
Adjusting the Tempo .......................................................................................
The current tempo, indicated at the left edge of the display, depends on
the selected style (see page 49). To change the tempo, press the TEMPO [–]
and [+] buttons.
26
CVP-202
You can change the metronome’s time signature and volume using the
settings in the METRONOME page.
Displaying the Metronome Settings ..............................................
To display the METRONOME page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then
[METRONOME].
Changing the Metronome Settings
The METRONOME display appears.
Setting the Beat (Time Signature)....................................................
BEAT
Settings: NORMAL, 2 — 5
Basic setting: NORMAL
Use the BEAT and buttons to change the time signature. (If the BEAT
function is highlighted, you can also change its settings with the data dial or the
[–] and [+] buttons.)
When NORMAL is selected, the metronome ticks steadily at the current
tempo with no accented beats.
When BEAT is set to 2, 3, 4, or 5, the metronome ticks off measures with the
selected number of beats, playing a bell sound on the first beat of each measure.
Setting the Metronome Volume ...........................................................
VOLUME
Range: 0 — 127
Basic setting: 64
Use the VOLUME and buttons to change the metronome volume.
(If the VOLUME function is highlighted, you can also change its settings
with the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.)
The volume of the metronome is determined by both the VOLUME func-
tion and the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider (except in Song mode, in
which case the volume of the metronome is not affected by the slider). If you
use the slider, the playback volume for the Automatic Accompaniment (page
50) will also be affected.
Using the Metronome
24
DIRECT ACCESS
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
27
CVP-202
The Help mode provides convenient explanations of the main
functions of the Clavinova. You can select help topics from a menu
displayed on the LCD, or press a button on the panel to get help
information related to that control.
Z Call up the Help mode. ...............................................................................
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
HELP
While the Help mode is active, no other
operations can be performed.
Press the [HELP] button.
The Help menu display appears.
X Select the language if necessary. ...................................................
The selected language is always backed
up even after the power is turned off.
Select the desired language for help (ENGLISH, JAPANESE, GER-
MAN, FRENCH, or SPANISH) by pressing the fourth LCD button.
Using the Help Mode
25
DEMO
HELP
C Select a help topic. .........................................................................................
Use the SELECT and LCD buttons to select one of the follow-
ing eight menu items.
Help Topics
Basic Operations
Accompaniment
Demo Songs
Song Playback
Voices
Song Recording
Styles
Functions
The selected menu is highlighted.
Press the LCD button under ENTER to enter your selection.
The first page of the selected help information is displayed.
28
CVP-202
V Turn the pages and read the help information..................
Use the fourth LCD button to advance the page. You can also press
the third LCD button if you want to go back and read the previous page.
B Exit the Help topic. ..........................................................................................
Press the LCD button under EXIT to return to the Help menu. You
can select another menu item or panel button and read through other help
topics.
N Exit the Help mode. ........................................................................................
To exit the Help mode and to go back to the main display at any time,
simply press [HELP].
Using the Help Mode
26
DEMO
HELP
29
CVP-202
CHAPTER 3: Voices
Selecting Voices
Exiting the Display
To return to the main display, press [EXIT].
Backing Up the Selected Voice
When the power is turned ON, the Grand
Piano 1 voice is selected automatically.
However, if the Backup function (page
152) is set to ON, the last selected voice
will automatically be selected.
The last selected voice in each group can
be retained in memory, even after turning
off the power, when the Backup function
(page 152) is set to ON.
The Clavinova features a wealth of rich, authentic voices, including
piano, strings and brass instruments. It also features a Keyboard
Percussion function that lets you play the realistic drum and
percussion sounds directly from the keyboard.
Voice Types
• Clavinova Voices : 243
• XG Voices : 480
• Drum/SFX Kits : 14
* For a list of the voices, see page 3 in the Data List.
* The Clavinova’s voices are divided into twelve groups, corre-
sponding to the twelve VOICE buttons on the panel.
ZSelect the voice group.............................................................................
Select the desired voice group by pressing the appropriate VOICE
button.
The VOICE SELECT display appears.
Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display
27
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPL I T
REVERB
EFFECT
CVP-202
30
You can also select a voice using the RIGHT1 VOICE function in the
main display.
About Ensemble Voices
The Clavinova’s ensemble voices are
rich, dual-like voices that you can play
without entering the Dual mode (page
33.) Press the [Ensemble] button to
display a menu of ensemble voices.
About XG Voices
Yamaha’s XG format is a major new
enhancement to the GM (General MIDI)
System Level 1 format. It provides for
more instrument sounds and variations,
as well as greater expressive control over
voices and effects. XG also ensures
compatibility with future instruments and
software.
Press the [XG] button to display a
menu of XG voices.
Press another VOICE button while
holding down the [XG] button to dis-
play a list of XG voices in the corre-
sponding category.
Selecting Voices from the Main Display
ZSelect the RIGHT1 VOICE function. ..............................................
If the RIGHT1 VOICE function is not already highlighted, press the
fourth LCD button to highlight it.
XSelect the voice...................................................................................................
Select the voice using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can
also hold down RIGHT1 VOICE to advance the voice selection continu-
ously. (When selecting a voice in this way, the voice can be selected not
only from a certain voice group but from all voices.)
CPlay the voice. .......................................................................................................
Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.
Selecting Voices
XSelect the voice..................................................................................................
Select the desired voice by pressing the appropriate LCD button. The
data dial and [–] and [+] buttons can be also used.
Each VOICE SELECT display consists of two or more pages. Use the
PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the various pages.
CPlay the selected voice. .............................................................................
Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.
Automatic Voice-related Settings
Selecting a voice automatically selects
the best-suited reverb, chorus, effect,
and other settings for that particular
voice. You can disable this so that set-
tings are not automatically selected by
using the VOICE SETTING function
(page 137).
28
31
CVP-202
The Clavinova has twelve drum kits and two SFX kits , found on pages
3 and 5 of the [PERCUSSION] voice group. When one of the drum or SFX
kits is selected, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are
assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.
The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit
are indicated by symbols above the assigned keys.
See the drum/SFX kit list on page 8 in the Data List for a listing of the
sounds in each drum/SFX kit.
When a drum kit is selected, only the
keys with drum or percussion symbols
printed above them will sound.
When an SFX kit is selected, keys
other than those which have been
assigned a special effect sound will not
produce any sound.
The Transpose (page 136), Tune
(page 136) and Octave (pages 32,34
and 38) functions do not affect the
drum/SFX kits.
You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display page
to change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the
RIGHT1 VOICE function.
The settings you make in this page affect
any voices you select using the RIGHT1
VOICE function. Different settings cannot
be made for each voice.
Displaying the Main Voice Keyboard Settings ..................
Z If you are playing in Dual mode or Split mode, make sure RIGHT1
VOICE is selected in the main display.
X Press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any of the VOICE buttons.
The KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display appears.
You can switch between the KEYBOARD
[RIGHT1] page and the [RIGHT2] (page
34) or [LEFT] (page 37) displays using
the PAGE [
<
] and [
>
] buttons.
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Main Voice
Keyboard Percussion
Selecting Voices
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
VOICE
SYNTH.
STRINGS
D
CHOIR &
PAD
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
DIRECT ACCESS
29
CVP-202
32
X Adjust the volume of the main voice.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold
down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
Setting the Volume of the Main Voice ...........................................
You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1]
page to change the volume of the main voice.
To adjust the overall keyboard volume,
use the KBD VOL function in the main
display (page 23) instead.
Z Press the VOLUME button.
The VOLUME function is highlighted.
VOLUME
Range: 0 — 127
Basic setting: 127
Setting the Octave of the Main Voice ...........................................
The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets
you adjust the pitch of the main voice up or down by one or two octaves.
Press the OCTAVE button.
The value changes each time you press the button.
OCTAVE
Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)
–1 (1 octave lower)
0 (no octave shift)
+1 (1 octave higher)
+2 (2 octaves higher)
Basic setting: 0
Setting the Stereo Position of the Main Voice ....................
The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT1] display lets you
adjust the stereo position of the main voice.
Z Press the PAN button.
The PAN function is highlighted.
PAN
Settings: L — — R
Basic setting: (center)
Selecting Voices
X Adjust the stereo position.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position,
or hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic set-
ting.
Some voices have octave settings that
are selected automatically when the
voice is selected. (Such settings are not
displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You
can prevent the octave setting from
changing when a voice is selected by
setting the VOICE SETTING function
(page 137) to MANUAL.
30
33
CVP-202
Playing Two Voices
Simultaneously — Dual Mode
To change the main voice while playing in Dual mode, select the
RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal
manner.
The Dual mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two
different voices simultaneously in a layer. This makes it easy to
create exceptionally rich and thick tonal textures. You can also set
the volume, octave, and stereo position for the second voice, and
detune the second voice from the main voice to create a thicker
sound.
Z Select the main voice. ..................................................................................
Select a voice in the normal way (page 29), then press [EXIT] to re-
turn to the main display.
X Call up the Dual mode. ................................................................................
To call up the Dual mode, press the [DUAL] button.
The RIGHT2 VOICE function appears in the lower right corner of
the LCD display, and the current second voice is displayed to the
right of the main voice (after the plus sign).
Second Voice
Range: All voices
Basic setting: SlowStrs
Selecting the Second Voice
C Select the second voice............................................................................
Select the second voice in the same manner as described for the main
voice (page 29). To select the second voice, the RIGHT2 VOICE func-
tion must be highlighted.
Changing the Main Voice in Dual Mode
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
DUAL
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
31
If you use the VOICE buttons to select a
voice while either the tempo or the KBD
VOL function is highlighted, the voice you
select will be used as the main voice.
CVP-202
34
You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page
to change the volume, octave, pan and detune of the voice selected using
the RIGHT2 VOICE function.
The settings you make in this page affect
any voices you select using the RIGHT2
VOICE function. Different settings cannot
be made for each voice.
Displaying the Second Voice Keyboard Settings............
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [DUAL].
If the RIGHT2 VOICE function is selected
in the main display, you can also display
the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] page by
pressing [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by
any one of the VOICE buttons.
The KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display appears.
You can switch between the KEYBOARD
[RIGHT2] page and the [RIGHT1] (page
31) or [LEFT] (page 37) displays using
the PAGE [
<
] and [
>
] buttons.
Setting the Volume of the Second Voice ...................................
You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2]
page to change the volume of the second voice.
To adjust the overall keyboard volume,
use the KBD VOL function in the main
display (page 23) instead.
Z Press the VOLUME button.
The VOLUME function is highlighted.
VOLUME
Range: 0 — 127
Basic setting: 127
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Second Voice
X Adjust the volume of the second voice.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold
down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
Setting the Octave of the Second Voice....................................
The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets
you adjust the pitch of the second voice up or down by one or two oc-
taves. Press the OCTAVE button.
The value changes each time you press the button.
OCTAVE
Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)
–1 (1 octave lower)
0 (no octave shift)
+1 (1 octave higher)
+2 (2 octaves higher)
Basic setting: 0
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode
Some voices have octave settings that
are selected automatically when the
voice is selected. (Such settings are not
displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You
can prevent the octave setting from
changing when a voice is selected by
setting the VOICE SETTING function
(page 137) to MANUAL.
GUITAR
C
USSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
OIR &
P
AD
DUAL
SPL I T
REVERB
EFFECT
DIRECT ACCESS
32
35
CVP-202
Setting the Stereo Position of the Second Voice ...........
The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display lets you
adjust the stereo position of the second voice.
Z Press the PAN button.
The PAN function is highlighted.
PAN
Settings: L — — R
Basic setting: (center)
Detuning the Second Voice....................................................................
The DETUNE function in the KEYBOARD [RIGHT2] display page
lets you detune the pitch of the second voice slightly from that of the
main voice, to produce an even richer sound.
Z Press the DETUNE button.
The DETUNE function is highlighted.
DETUNE
Range: 0 — 10
Basic setting: 5
X Adjust the stereo position.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or
hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
X Adjust the detune depth.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the detune depth, or
hold down the DETUNE button to increase the detune depth.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
Press the [DUAL] button to exit Dual mode.
The [DUAL] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer
plays in Dual mode.
Exiting the Dual Mode
Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode
GUITAR
C
USSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
OIR &
P
AD
DUAL
SPL I T
REVERB
EFFECT
33
CVP-202
36
To change the main voice while playing in Split mode, select the
RIGHT1 VOICE function then select the main voice in the normal manner.
Changing the Main Voice in Split Mode
Playing Two Voices on Different
Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode
The Split mode of the Clavinova allows you to select and play two
different voices with each hand. For example, you can play the
bass with your left hand and the piano with your right hand.
Z Select the main voice. ...................................................................................
Select a voice in the normal way (page 29), then press [EXIT] to re-
turn to the main display. The voice you select will be played by the right
range of the keyboard.
X Call up the Split mode. .................................................................................
To call up the Split mode, press the [SPLIT] button.
The LEFT VOICE function appears in the bottom center of the LCD
display, and the current left voice is displayed to the left of the main
voice (before the slash). Also, the keyboard guide lamp corre-
sponding to the split point lights.
Split point
The split point is the key that divides the
right and left sides of the keyboard. You
can change the split point using the
SPLIT POINT function in the KEY-
BOARD [LEFT] display page (page 39).
You can use the Single Finger, Multi
Finger, Fingered1, or Fingered2 modes
(page 59) of the Automatic Accompani-
ment function while playing in Split
mode. In this case, pressing the keys in
the left range will play the Automatic
Accompaniment voices as well as the left
voice.
C Select the left voice. ........................................................................................
Select the left voice in the same manner as described for the main
voice (page 29). To select the left voice, the LEFT VOICE function must
be highlighted.
Left Voice
Range: All voices
Basic setting: Aco.Bass
Selecting the Left Voice
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
SPLIT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
34
If you use the VOICE buttons to select a
voice while either the tempo or the KBD
VOL function is highlighted, the voice
you select will be used as the main
voice.
37
CVP-202
You can use the settings in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display page to
change the volume, octave, and pan of the voice selected using the LEFT
VOICE function. You can also select the keyboard range that is affected
by the pedals, as well as the split point that separates the right and left
ranges, using the functions in this page.
The settings you make in this page affect
any voices you select using the LEFT
VOICE function. Different settings cannot
be made for each voice.
Displaying the Left Voice Keyboard Settings .....................
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [SPLIT].
If the LEFT VOICE function is selected in
the main display, you can also display
the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page by pressing
[DIRECT ACCESS] followed by any one
of the VOICE buttons.
The KEYBOARD [LEFT] display appears.
You can switch between the KEYBOARD
[LEFT] page and the [RIGHT1] (page 31)
or [RIGHT2] (page 34) displays using the
PAGE [
<
] and [
>
] buttons.
Setting the Volume of the Left Voice ............................................
You can use the VOLUME function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] page
to change the volume of the left voice.
To adjust the overall keyboard volume,
use the KBD VOL function in the main
display (page 23) instead.
ZZ
ZZ
Z Press the VOLUME button.
The VOLUME function is highlighted.
VOLUME
Range: 0 — 127
Basic setting: 127
Changing the Keyboard Settings for the Left Voice
XX
XX
X Adjust the volume of the left voice.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the volume, or hold
down the VOLUME button to increase the volume.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode
GUITAR
C
USSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
OIR &
P
AD
DUAL
SPL I T
REVERB
EFFECT
DIRECT ACCESS
35
CVP-202
38
PAN
Settings: L — — R
Basic setting: (center)
PEDAL
Settings: R (right only)
L (left only)
L+R (both)
Basic setting: R
Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode
X Adjust the stereo position.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the stereo position, or
hold down the PAN button to move the position to the right.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
Setting the Stereo Position of the Left Voice .......................
The PAN function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you ad-
just the stereo position of the left voice.
Z Press the PAN button.
The PAN function is highlighted.
Setting the Range Affected by the Right and Left
Pedals .........................................................................................................................
The PEDAL function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you
specify which ranges of the keyboard will be affected by the damper and
glide functions controlled by the left and right pedals when playing in
Split mode. Press the PEDAL button.
The value changes each time you press the button.
See page 138 for a list of the functions
that can be controlled by the left pedal.
OCTAVE
Settings: –2 (2 octaves lower)
–1 (1 octave lower)
0 (no octave shift)
+1 (1 octave higher)
+2 (2 octaves higher)
Basic setting: +1
Setting the Octave of the Left Voice ..............................................
The OCTAVE function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT] display lets you
adjust the pitch of the left voice up or down by one or two octaves. Press
the OCTAVE button.
The value changes each time you press the button.
Some voices have octave settings that
are selected automatically when the
voice is selected. (Such settings are not
displayed by the OCTAVE function.) You
can prevent the octave setting from
changing when a voice is selected by
setting the VOICE SETTING function
(page 137) to MANUAL.
36
39
CVP-202
Z Press the SPLIT POINT button.
The SPLIT function is highlighted.
X Change the split point.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the split point, or hold
down the SPLIT POINT button to move the split point to the right.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
C3
Playing Two Voices on Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode
The keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected Split Point
lights, and the key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function.
Changing the Split Point ............................................................................
You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the KEYBOARD [LEFT]
display to set the split point at any desired key position. In Split mode, the
left voice is played by all keys to the left of (and including) the split point.
The basic setting of the Split Point is F#2.
F 2
C3 C4 C5 C6 C7C2C1C0
Right range
Left range
SPLIT POINT
Settings: Any key of the keyboard
Basic setting: F
#
2
Exiting the Split Mode
Press the [SPLIT] button to exit Split mode.
The [SPLIT] button lamp turns off, and the keyboard no longer plays
in Split mode.
XGSYNTH.
OIR &
P
AD
SPLIT EFFECT
37
The [DUAL] and [SPLIT] buttons can be turned on simultaneously.
When you do so, the right range of the keyboard will play both the main
voice and the second voice.
Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously
When both the Dual and Split modes are
turned on, the name of either the second
voice or the left voice will be displayed
together with the main voice in the main
display.
CVP-202
40
Using the Pedals
The Clavinova has three pedals.
Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION]
and [XG] groups may not be affected
by use of the damper pedal.
Some voices may sound continuously
or have a long decay after the notes
have been released while the damper
pedal is held.
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto
pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as
the pedal is held, but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained.
This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes
are played staccato.
Certain voices in the [PERCUSSION]
and [XG] groups may not be affected
by use of the sostenuto pedal.
Certain voices, such as [ORGAN&
ACCORDION] or [BRASS], sustain
continuously when the sostenuto pedal
is pressed.
The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an
actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after
releasing the keys.
Damper Pedal (Right)
Sostenuto Pedal (Center)
Soft Pedal (Left)
Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of
the notes you play.
You can also assign one of many other functions to this pedal; for exam-
ple, you can use it to start/stop the Automatic Accompaniment, or use it to
play Fill Ins. See page 138 for details.
The effect of the soft pedal may differ
slightly depending on the selected voice.
38
41
CVP-202
CHAPTER 4:
Reverb and Other Effects
Reverb
Reverb ON/OFF
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
The lamp lights.
The setting of the [REVERB] button has
no effect on Song mode or Auto Accom-
paniment playback.
To turn the reverb off, press [REVERB] again.
The lamp turns off.
Because the basic setting of the [REVERB] button depends on the
voice, the reverb may turn on or off automatically when you select a dif-
ferent voice.
To apply reverb to the keyboard part(s), press the [REVERB] button.
Reverb is an effect that recreates the acoustic ambiance of a
performance space — anything from a room in a jazz club to a
concert hall. The Clavinova lets you choose from a variety of
reverb effects; you can also set the depth of any reverb effect to
your preference.
REVERB
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
Turning the Reverb On or Off
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPL I T
REVERB
EFFECT
Changing the Reverb Settings
You can change the reverb type and depth using the REVERB and
REVERB DEPTH display pages.
Displaying the Reverb Settings .........................................................
ZZ
ZZ
Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REVERB].
DIRECT ACCESS
BASS
XG
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
39
42
CVP-202
Use the TYPE and buttons to change the reverb type, or select
the TYPE function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.
The selected reverb type is highlighted.
Because the basic setting of the reverb type depends on the accompa-
niment style, the reverb type may change automatically when you select
a different style.
The reverb type selection affects all
voices played by the keyboard or Auto
Accompaniment. Different settings
cannot be made for each part.
Depending on the selected voice, the
depth of the effect may sound stronger
or weaker, even though the same
reverb type is selected.
The reverb effect cannot be applied to
the sounds input through the AUX IN
[R] and [L/L+R] jacks.
It is also possible to apply reverb ef-
fects to the keyboard voices using the
[EFFECT] button. See “Changing the
Effect Settings” on page 46 for details.
If both the [REVERB] and [EFFECT]
buttons are turned on, both effects will
be applied.
Setting the Total Depth ................................................................................
The overall depth of the selected reverb effect can be set using the
TOTAL DEPTH function in the REVERB display.
Z Select the TOTAL DEPTH function.
The TOTAL DEPTH function is highlighted.
TOTAL DEPTH
Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
Basic setting: 64
Reverb Type
Settings: See table on page 163.
Basic setting: Depends on style.
Changing the Reverb Type .....................................................................
You can change the reverb type using the REVERB display.
X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the
REVERB page and the REVERB DEPTH page.
If you press the [
>
] button while the
REVERB DEPTH page is showing, the
CHORUS page will be displayed. Refer
to the other sections of this chapter for
details on chorus and other effect set-
tings.
The LCD displays either the REVERB page or the REVERB
DEPTH page (whichever was selected most recently).
Reverb
40
43
CVP-202
Reverb
X Set the total depth of the reverb effect.
You can change the setting using the TOTAL DEPTH and but-
tons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons.
To reset the value to the basic setting of 64, simultaneously press
either the TOTAL DEPTH and buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons.
The TOTAL DEPTH setting globally
affects all voices. Different settings
cannot be made for each voice.
You can also set the reverb depth
separately for the rhythm and accom-
paniment parts, and for each keyboard
part. (See the next operation.)
Z Select a part.
Press the LCD button corresponding to RHYTHM to set the reverb
depth for the drum part, or ACMP to set it for all other accompani-
ment parts. Select LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the reverb depth
for the corresponding keyboard part.
You can also select several parts at
once and adjust their settings simulta-
neously.
The selected function is highlighted.
X Set the reverb depth.
RHYTHM and ACMP
Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
Basic setting: 64
LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2
Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
Set the reverb depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or
[–] and [+] buttons.
You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD
button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
[–] and [+] buttons.
The amount of reverb that is applied to a
part depends on both the part depth and
TOTAL DEPTH settings. If one of the
settings is 0, no reverb will be applied to
that part even if the other setting is 127.
Because the basic settings of the LEFT, RIGHT1, and RIGHT2 func-
tions depend on the voices selected, a reverb depth setting may
change automatically when you select a different part.
Setting the Reverb Depth for Each Part ....................................
The settings in the REVERB DEPTH display (page 42) let you set the
reverb depth separately for the rhythm and accompaniment parts, as well
as the parts you play from the keyboard.
41
44
CVP-202
Changing the Chorus Settings
Unlike the reverb (page 41) and other effects (page 46), which can be
turned on or off using the appropriate panel buttons, the chorus feature is
always considered to be “on.” How chorus is applied to any given voice
depends on the current chorus type and depth settings. You can change
these settings using the functions in the CHORUS display page.
Chorus
The Clavinova’s chorus effects let you modify the voices you play
from the keyboard, adding warmth for an even richer sound.
Flanger effects add pronounced modulation, for a spacy futuris-
tic quality. You can choose from a variety of chorus and flanger
effects, and set the depth of the effect added to each keyboard
voice.
Displaying the Chorus Settings........................................................
Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REVERB].
The LCD displays either the REVERB page or the REVERB
DEPTH page (whichever was selected most recently).
X Press the PAGE [>] button once or twice, as needed.
You can also press [DIRECT AC-
CESS] followed by [EFFECT], then
use the PAGE [
<
] button to display the
CHORUS page from either the EF-
FECT page or the EFFECT DEPTH
page.
Refer to the other sections of this
chapter for details on reverb and other
effect settings.
Press PAGE [>] twice if the REVERB page was displayed, or once if
the REVERB DEPTH page was displayed.
The CHORUS page is displayed.
Chorus Type
Settings: See table on page 163.
Basic setting: Depends on style.
You can change the chorus type selection in the CHORUS page.
Use the CHORUS and buttons to change the chorus type, or
select the CHORUS function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] but-
tons.
Changing the Chorus Type.....................................................................
42
The settings of the CHORUS display
have no effect on Song mode or Auto
Accompaniment playback.
45
CVP-202
Chorus
The selected chorus type is highlighted.
Because the basic setting of the chorus type depends on the accompa-
niment style, the chorus type may change automatically when you select
a different style.
The chorus type selection affects all
keyboard parts. Different settings
cannot be made for each part.
Depending on the selected voice, the
depth of the effect may sound stronger
or weaker, even though the same
chorus type is selected.
It is also possible to apply chorus
effects to the keyboard voices using
the [EFFECT] button. See “Changing
the Effect Settings” on page 46 for
details.
Setting the Chorus Depth for Each Part ...................................
The other settings in the CHORUS page let you set the chorus depth
separately for each part you play from the keyboard.
Z Select a part.
Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the chorus depth for the cor-
responding keyboard part.
You can also select several parts at once
and adjust their settings simultaneously.
The selected function is highlighted.
X Set the chorus depth.
Chorus Depth functions
Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
Set the chorus depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or
[–] and [+] buttons.
You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD
button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
[–] and [+] buttons.
Because the basic settings of the chorus depth functions depend on
the voices selected, a chorus depth setting may change automatically
when you select a different voice.
Since the chorus feature is always on,
you should set a chorus depth of 0 for
any parts that you don’t want affected by
the chorus effect.
43
46
CVP-202
The LCD displays either the EFFECT page or the EFFECT
DEPTH page (whichever was used most recently).
Voice Effects
The Clavinova has a variety of effects besides reverb and chorus
that you can use to enhance the sound of the voices or create wild,
special effects. You can adjust the depth of the effect as desired.
To apply the effect to the keyboard parts, press the [EFFECT] button.
Turning the Effects On
Effect ON/OFF
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
The lamp lights.
When the effect system is also used by
an accompaniment style or song, the
effect being applied to the keyboard
part(s) may automatically be turned off
when you start the Auto Accompaniment
or select the song for playback, depend-
ing on the effect type selected by the
style or song. If this happens, you may
be able to apply the effect to the key-
board part(s) by pressing the [EFFECT]
button - again, this depends on the se-
lected effect type. If you do so, the effect
will not be applied to voices played by the
Auto Accompaniment or song.
To turn the effect off, press [EFFECT] again.
The lamp turns off.
Because the basic setting of the [EFFECT] button depends on the
voice, the effect may turn on or off automatically when you select a dif-
ferent voice.
Changing the Effect Settings
You can change the current effect type and depth using the EFFECT
and EFFECT DEPTH display pages.
\ Displaying the Effect Settings .............................................................
Z Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [EFFECT].
If you press the [
<
] button while the
EFFECT page is showing, the CHORUS
page will be displayed. Refer to the first
two sections of this chapter for details on
reverb and chorus settings.
The [EFFECT] lamp will not light if the
effect depth (page 48) is set to 0.
EFFECT
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
DIRECT ACCESS
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPL I T
REVERB
EFFECT
BASS
XG
DUAL
SPL I T
REVERB
EFFECT
44
47
CVP-202
Changing the Effect Type ..........................................................................
You can change the effect type selection in the EFFECT page. Select
an effect type using the TYPE and buttons, or highlight the TYPE
function and use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.
Effect Type
Settings: See table on page 164.
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
To reset the effect type to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
EFFECT TYPE and buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons.
The selected effect type is highlighted.
Because the basic setting of the effect type depends on the voice, the
effect type may change automatically when you select a different voice.
The effect type selection affects all
keyboard parts. Different settings
cannot be made for each part.
When the basic setting of the [EF-
FECT] button is ON for two or three
voices selected in Dual and/or Split
mode, the Clavinova will automatically
select the most appropriate effect type
and set the effect depth (page 48) for
each part to an appropriate level.
Depending on the selected voice, the
depth of the effect may sound stronger
or weaker, even though the same
effect type is selected.
If both the [EFFECT] and [REVERB]
buttons are turned on, both effects will
be applied.
Voice Effects
X Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to switch between the EF-
FECT and EFFECT DEPTH pages.
The value displayed by the VARIATION function switches between
OFF and ON, and the effect changes.
The way in which the effect changes depends on the effect type (see
the table on page 164). Also, because the basic setting of the VARIA-
TION function depends on the voice, the setting of this function may
change automatically when you select a different voice.
Varying the Effect .............................................................................................
Each of the Clavinova’s effect types has a variation that can be se-
lected using the VARIATION function in the EFFECT page. To vary the
effect produced by the selected effect type, press the LCD button under
VARIATION.
VARIATION function
Settings: OFF, ON
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
45
48
CVP-202
Effect Depth functions
Range: 0 (no effect) — 127 (max.)
Basic setting: Depends on voice.
X Set the effect depth.
Set the effect depth for the highlighted part by using the data dial or
[–] and [+] buttons.
You can also advance a value by pressing the corresponding LCD
button. To reset a value to its basic setting, simultaneously press the
[–] and [+] buttons.
Because the basic settings of the effect depth functions depend on the
voices selected, an effect depth setting may change automatically
when you select a different voice.
Setting the Effect Depth for Each Part .......................................
The settings in the EFFECT DEPTH page let you set the effect depth
separately for each part you play from the keyboard.
Z Select a part.
Press LEFT, RIGHT1, or RIGHT2 to set the effect depth for the cor-
responding keyboard part.
The selected function is highlighted.
Voice Effects
46
49
CVP-202
CHAPTER 5:
Accompaniment Styles
Selecting Accompaniment Styles
The Clavinova has a wide variety of musical “styles” that you can use for simple
percussion accompaniment, or as the basis of a fully orchestrated accompaniment
— including bass and rhythm parts — using the Auto Accompaniment feature (page
57). There is also a selection of “Pianist” styles that let you play with piano
accompaniment when you activate the Auto Accompaniment.
Selecting a Style
Style Types
• Rhythm styles: 134
• Pianist styles: 36
• Custom styles: 4
* For information on the styles, see the Style List on page 10 in the Data
List.
* The Clavinova’s styles are divided into eleven groups, corresponding to
the eleven STYLE buttons on the panel.
* The PIANIST styles and Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ style group do
not include drum sounds. Use the Auto Accompaniment (page 58) to
play these styles.
Z Select an accompaniment style group. .....................................
Disk and Custom Styles
The [DISK/CUSTOM] button lets you use
styles on optional Style File Disks (page
86) or your original styles (page 73) .
Select the desired style group by pressing the appropriate STYLE
button.
The corresponding STYLE SELECT display appears.
The last selected style in each group
can be retained in memory, even after
turning off the power, when the Backup
function (page 152) is set to ON.
When the power is turned on, the
60’sGtrPop style is automatically
selected. However, if the Backup
function (page 152) is set to ON, the
last selected style will be selected
instead.
Accompaniment styles cannot be
selected in the Song Play mode page
93.
(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
CANCEL
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
47
CVP-202
50
X Select a style...........................................................................................................................
Select the desired style by pressing the appropriate LCD button.
Accompaniment Tempo
Whenever you select a style,
the preset tempo for that
style is also selected (unless
you change the style during
playback, in which case the
current tempo is main-
tained).
Adjust the tempo as de-
scribed on page 25.
Accompaniment Volume
Use the [ACMP/SONG VOL-
UME] slider to adjust the play-
back volume, as described on
page 23.
You can also select a style using the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.
Each STYLE SELECT display consists of more than one page. Use the PAGE
[<] and [
>>
>>
>] buttons to switch between pages.
C Return to the main display .......................................................................................
Press [EXIT] to return to the main display.
Selecting Accompaniment Styles
PAG E
EXIT
48
51
CVP-202
You will use the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons and the START/
STOP buttons to select style variations and control style playback.
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO F I LL
INTRO
Each of the Clavinova’s styles has four variations, corresponding to
the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT buttons labeled as [MAIN A], [MAIN
B], [MAIN C], and [MAIN D].
Varying the Style
Use these buttons to select style variations.
Main A is generally the most rudimentary form of the style; the other
variations are more or less lavish embellishments on the same basic
theme. By judiciously switching between variations as you play, you can
add variety and make the performance more interesting.
Selecting a Variation ........................................................................................
You can select a style variation before you start playing the style. To
select a variation, simply press the corresponding button.
The Clavinova will begin playing the selected style variation when
you start the style using one of the methods described in the next section.
Playing Fill-in Patterns ..................................................................................
Fill-in patterns
A “fill-in pattern” is a embellishment of the
basic rhythm, usually played at the end of
a musical phrase as an exciting transition
into the next segment.
If you select a different style variation while the style is playing, the
Clavinova will play an automatic fill-in pattern as it switches to the new
variation. The fill-in pattern, like the main pattern, is different for each
variation.
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
The button’s lamp lights.
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FILL
INTRO
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FILL
INTRO
49
CVP-202
52
To change the variation while the style is playing, press the button
corresponding to the new variation.
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to pause
the style or play a special fill-in pattern by
setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page
138) to BREAK or BREAK FIL.
The button’s lamp flashes as the Clavinova plays the fill-in pattern.
Generally speaking, the Clavinova will start the fill-in pattern soon
after you press the button. If you select a variation after the last eighth
note of a measure, however, it will begin the fill-in pattern from the start
of the next measure.
When the fill-in pattern is finished, the button’s lamp lights steadily
as the Clavinova plays the main pattern.
The auto fill-in feature provides an exciting transition as you switch
from one variation to another. If Main A is playing and you press [MAIN
B], for example, the Clavinova will play Fill-in B, then start playing
Main B.
You can also play fill-in patterns without
selecting a different variation. Just press
the button for the variation that is playing.
The Clavinova will play the fill-in for that
variation, then return to the main pattern.
More Fun With Fill-ins ....................................................................................
Changing the Fill-in
It is possible to switch variations while a fill-in pattern is playing. The
Clavinova will switch to the fill-in pattern for the new variation, then
continue with the new main pattern as usual.
Repeating the Fill-in
If you hold down the flashing button, or press it after the last eighth
note of the measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the fill-in pat-
tern will be repeated.
Canceling the Fill-in
If you press the flashing button earlier than the last eighth note of the
measure while the fill-in pattern is playing, the Clavinova will stop
playing the fill-in pattern and continue with the main pattern.
Starting the Accompaniment Style
There are several ways to start the accompaniment style, as described
below:
Standard Start.........................................................................................................
This is the simplest way to start a style. If necessary, select a variation
as described on page 51, then press the [START/STOP] button.
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to start
and stop the style by setting the LEFT
PEDAL function (page 138) to START/
STOP.
The lamp lights and the style starts.
Beat Indicator
During style playback, the leftmost beat
lamp (red) flashes on the first beat of
each measure, and the other lamps
(green) flash for each successive beat.
The current tempo and measure number
are shown at the left edge of the main
display.
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
50
53
CVP-202
Synchronized Start............................................................................................
This method lets you start the style by simply playing a note or chord
on the keyboard.
Z Set the Synchronized Start function.
If the [SYNCHRO] button is pressed
while a style is playing, style playback
stops and Synchronized Start is auto-
matically set to stand-by.
When you play the keyboard in Split
mode (page 36) or use the Auto Ac-
companiment in a mode other than
FULL KEYBOARD (page 61), only the
left-hand section of the keyboard will
trigger a synchronized start.
If necessary, select a variation as described on page 51, then press the
[SYNCHRO] button.
X Start playing.
To cancel the Synchronized Start func-
tion before you start the style, press the
[SYNCHRO] button again.
When you are ready, play a note on the keyboard. The style starts
playing when you play the first note.
The [SYNCHRO] lamp turns off, the [START/STOP] lamp lights,
and the style starts.
Tap Start.........................................................................................................................
This function lets you set the tempo and start the style in one opera-
tion.
If necessary, select a variation as described on page 51, then tap the
[TAP] button at the desired tempo. Tap four times for 2- and 4-beat
styles, three times for 3-beat styles, and five times for 5-beat styles.
If you do not tap the [TAP] button the
required number of times (i.e., 3 times for
a 3-beat style), the Tap Start function will
be canceled after a few seconds.
The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during style
playback (by tapping the button twice). In this case the tap “click” will
not sound.
When playing a 4-beat style… Tap 4 times.
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
The lamp lights, and the red [BEAT] lamp flashes in time with the
current tempo.
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
51
CVP-202
54
Adding an Introduction .................................................................................
This function lets you embellish the start of a tune by adding an intro-
duction.
Z Set the introduction pattern.
Select the variation to play the intro pattern as described on page 51,
then press the [INTRO] button. There are three introduction patterns,
as shown below:
Pattern Played by:
Intro A [MAIN A]
Intro B [MAIN B]
Intro C/D [MAIN C] or [MAIN D]
Intro Patterns
The [INTRO] lamp lights, and the lamp for the selected variation
flashes.
The flashing light indicates the variation
that will play after the intro. In the illustra-
tion at left, the Clavinova will play Intro A,
followed by Main A.
X Select the main pattern.
Select the variation to play the main pattern when the intro is finished.
(If you want the style to continue playing with the same variation as
the introduction, you can skip this step.)
The lamp for the previously selected button lights, and the lamp of
the selected button flashes.
Since the flashing light indicates the
variation that will play after the intro, the
illustration at left indicates that the
Clavinova will play Intro C/D, followed by
Main A.
C Start the style.
To cancel the introduction before starting
the style, press the [INTRO] button again.
Use one of the three methods described on the preceding pages to
start playing the style.
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FILL
INTRO
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FILL
INTRO
52
55
CVP-202
Z Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button.
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to trigger
a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT
PEDAL function (page 138) to FADE IN/
OUT.
The lamp lights, and the Synchronized Start function (page 53)
turns on automatically.
X Start the style.
To cancel the fade-in before starting the
style, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button
again.
Use one of the three methods described on the preceding page to start
playing the style.
The [FADE IN/OUT] lamp flashes during the fade-in, then turns off
when the fade-in is completed.
There are also several ways to stop accompaniment style playback, as
described below:
Standard Stop .........................................................................................................
To stop style playback, press the [START/STOP] button.
Stopping the Accompaniment Style
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to start
and stop the style by setting the LEFT
PEDAL function (page 138) to START/
STOP.
The lamp turns off and the style stops instantly.
Adding an Ending ...............................................................................................
To play an ending pattern before the style playback stops, press the
[ENDING] button.
If you press the [ENDING] button on or
after the second beat of a measure, the
ending pattern will start at the top of the
next measure.
Fading In .............................................................................................................................
This function lets you gradually fade in the volume of the style. You can
set the Fade In function at any time before you start the style, and use it in
combination with any start method (including the Introduction function).
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
The ENDING lamp lights, and the Clavinova stops style playback after
playing an ending pattern.
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FILL
INTRO
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FILL
INTRO
53
CVP-202
56
Fading Out ..................................................................................................................
You can have the style fade out and automatically stop by pressing the
[FADE IN/OUT] button.
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to trigger
a fade-in or fade-out by setting the LEFT
PEDAL function (page 138) to FADE IN/
OUT.
The lamp flashes as the style fades out.
You can use the Fade Out function in combination with any pattern
(including the Introduction and Ending functions).
The Clavinova will play one of three ending patterns, depending on
the main pattern that is currently playing, as shown below.
Pattern Played by:
Ending A [MAIN A]
Ending B [MAIN B]
Ending C/D [MAIN C] or [MAIN D]
Ending Patterns
Press [ENDING] a second time while the ending pattern is playing to
produce a ritardando (gradually slowing) effect.
Using the Pedals
You can also use the left pedal to trigger
the ending pattern and ritardando by
setting the LEFT PEDAL function (page
138) to ENDING/RIT.
Playing the Accompaniment Styles
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOPENDING
FA DE
IN
/
OUT
54
57
CVP-202
The Clavinova includes a sophisticated Auto Accompaniment
system that can provide automated rhythm, bass and chord
backing for your performance in 134 different styles, as well as
36 different types of piano-only accompaniment.
The Auto Accompaniment playback data is normally not output by the
MIDI [OUT] terminal. To send the Auto Accompaniment data to another
MIDI instrument, use the ACMP&RHY and HARMONY functions in the
FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display described on page 150.
You can use one of several methods to indicate the chords that are to
be played by the Auto Accompaniment. Choose the accompaniment
mode that best suits your playing style.
Using the Auto Accompaniment
Detailed explanations of each accompa-
niment mode are given on pages 60 and
61.
Single Finger
The Single Finger method makes it easy to obtain accompaniment in
major, seventh, minor, and minor-seventh chords by pressing certain keys
(according to simple rules) to the left of the split point indicated by the
keyboard guide lamp. (See page 60.)
Multi Finger
When you select the Multi Finger mode, you can use either the Single
Finger method or the Fingered 1 method to indicate chords for the ac-
companiment. (See page 60.)
Fingered 1
The Fingered 1 method lets you control the Auto Accompaniment by
playing full chords to the left of the split point. (See page 60.)
Fingered 2
This mode accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered 1 mode, with
the exception that the lowest note played to the left of the split point is
used as the bass root (in Fingered 1 mode, the root of the chord is always
used as the bass root). Hence, you can select this mode to play “on bass”
or “fraction” chords. (See page 61.)
Full Keyboard
The Full Keyboard mode automatically produces appropriate auto-
matic accompaniment for virtually anything you play, anywhere on the
keyboard. (See page 61.)
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
ACMP ON
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
55
58
CVP-202
You may want to select an accompaniment mode (page 59) before
you start playing. If the accompaniment mode is set to your liking, you
can start the Auto Accompaniment as follows:
Z Select a style.........................................................................................................
Starting the Auto Accompaniment
Pianist styles
You can play the PIANIST styles and
Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ style
group with the Auto Accompaniment
(page 49). Since these styles do not
contain drum parts, you’ll have to indicate
a chord as you start the style to hear the
accompaniment.
Select the desired style. (See page 49.)
X Set the tempo and accompaniment volume. ......................
Use the TEMPO buttons to adjust the tempo (page 25), and the
[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume of the accompa-
niment parts (page 23).
C Turn on the Auto Accompaniment. ...............................................
The Auto Accompaniment will auto-
matically turn on when you select a
style in the Pianist style group.
The Auto Accompaniment can also be
turned on during playback of song data
recorded on the CVP-202.
If you turn the Auto Accompaniment on
while playing back songs recorded
using the Auto Accompaniment, the
recorded accompaniment track will be
dropped in favor of the accompaniment
you play on the keyboard.
Press the [ACMP ON] button.
Auto Accompaniment with the Synchronized Start function (page 53).
Also, a keyboard lamp shows the current split point.
V Start the Auto Accompaniment. .......................................................
You can also select style variations
and play fill-in patterns as described on
page 51 while playing along with the
Auto Accompaniment.
Press the [ACMP ON] button again to
turn the Auto Accompaniment off
before you start playing.
Begin playing to start the Auto Accompaniment with the Synchro-
nized Start function, or start the style using one (or more) of the other
methods described on pages 52 and 55.
The methods used to indicate Auto Accompaniment chords are de-
scribed in the following pages.
Stopping the Auto Accompaniment
Use one of the methods described on page 55 to stop playback of the
style, including the Auto Accompaniment.
To turn Auto Accompaniment off, press the [ACMP ON] button so
that the lamp goes out.
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
The [ACMP ON] lamp lights.
The [SYNCHRO] lamp also lights, indicating that you can start the
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
ACMP ON
56
59
CVP-202
You can change the accompaniment mode (which selects the chord
indication method), the split point, and other Auto Accompaniment set-
tings in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display page.
Displaying the Auto Accompaniment Settings..................
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [ACMP ON].
Changing the Auto Accompaniment Settings
Selecting an Accompaniment Mode..............................................
Accompaniment Mode
Settings: See insert below.
Basic setting: MULTI FINGER
Use the FINGERING and buttons to select an accompaniment
mode.
The method for indicating chords in each accompaniment mode are
described in detail below.
The ACCOMPANIMENT MODE display appears.
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
The selected accompaniment mode is highlighted.
DIRECT ACCESS
ACMP ON
57
60
CVP-202
Accompaniment Modes
The Clavinova displays the names of
the chords you play at the left edge of
the main display, below the tempo.
The same accompaniment continues
(even after you release the chord in
the left range) until you play the next
chord.
Single Finger Chords
The following four chord types can be played in Single Finger mode:
The illustration below shows the key
corresponding to each root note.
• Major
Press the root note of the chord.
• Minor [m]
Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any
black key to the left of it.
• Seventh [7]
Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any
white key to the left of it.
• Minor Seventh [m7]
Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any
white and black keys to the left of it (three keys at once).
Two-note fingerings will produce a chord
based on the previously played chord.
Fingered 1
To control the Auto Accompaniment, play any chord in the left range
of the keyboard (below and including the split point). Play the melody in
the right range along with the Auto Accompaniment.
The automatic accompaniment will
sometimes not change when related
chords are played in sequence (e.g.
some minor chords followed by the
minor seventh).
If the Clavinova cannot recognize a
chord you play, an asterisk “ * ” will
appear instead of the chord name in
the display.
Drums-only accompaniment can be
produced by pressing any three con-
secutive keys (e.g., C, C
#
, D) simulta-
neously. This lets you create dynamic
“drum breaks” in the accompaniment.
A series of dashes “- - -” will appear
instead of a chord name in the display.
Cm
C
7
Cm
7
C
Multi Finger
This method allows you to control the Auto Accompaniment using
either the Single Finger method (described above) or the Fingered 1
method (described below). However, when indicating minor, seventh or
minor seventh chords, it is necessary to play the white key and/or black
key nearest the root note of the chord.
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
Single Finger
To control the Auto Accompaniment, press one, two, or three keys in
the left range of the keyboard (below and including the split point), fol-
lowing the rules described below. Play the melody in the right range
along with the Auto Accompaniment.
CDEFGAB
F# Ab Bb
(Gb)(G#)(A#)
C # Eb
(Db)(D#)
58
61
CVP-202
Chords in Fingered 1 mode
The chord types below can be played in Fingered 1 mode. For a fin-
gering chart showing all chords in the example key of C, see page 12
of the Data List.
Major
Sixth [6]
Major seventh [M7]
Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 (b5)]
Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7 (#11)]
Added ninth [add 9]
Major seventh ninth [M7 (9)]
Six ninth [6 (9)]
Flatted fifth [(b5)]
Augmented [aug]
Seventh augmented [7 (#5)]
Major seventh augmented [M7 (#5)]
Minor [m]
Minor sixth [m6]
Minor seventh [m7]
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)]
Minor added ninth [m add 9]
Minor seventh ninth [m7 (9)]
Minor seventh eleventh [m7 (11)]
Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 (b5)]
Minor major seventh [mM7]
Minor major seventh ninth [mM7 (9)]
Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)]
Diminished seventh [dim7]
Seventh [7]
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]
Seventh ninth [7 (9)]
Seventh sharp eleventh [7 (#11)]
Seventh added thirteenth [7 (13)]
Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)]
Seventh flatted ninth [7 (b9)]
Seventh added flatted thirteenth [7 (b13)]
Seventh sharp ninth [7 (#9)]
Suspended fourth [sus4]
Fingered 2
To control the Auto Accompaniment, play chords in the left range of
the keyboard as for Fingered 1. In this mode, however, the lowest note
you play in the will be used as the bass root, as shown at right.
Chords in Fingered 2 mode
The Clavinova will recognize the same chord types as listed above for
Fingered 1 mode.
Although Full Keyboard mode is
designed to work with many types of
music, some arrangements may not
be suitable for use with this feature.
Chord detection occurs at approxi-
mately 8th-note intervals. Extremely
short chords less than an 8th note
in length may not be detected.
Keep in mind
You can use the Dual and Split modes
together with the Auto Accompaniment.
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
59
On-bass Chords
Full Keyboard
When the Full Keyboard mode is selected, the Clavinova will automati-
cally create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything
using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You don’t have to worry about
specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will
appear in the display.
C
C on E
C on G
62
CVP-202
Using the Synchronized Stop Function ...................................
The SYNCHRO STOP function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
display automatically stops the Auto Accompaniment when you’re not
holding down any keys to the left of the split point.
Press the SYNCHRO STOP button to turn the function on.
This function can only be turned on if the
Auto Accompaniment is on and Full
Keyboard mode is not selected.
The SYNCHRO STOP function is highlighted, and the [SYNCHRO]
lamp lights.
The Auto Accompaniment automatically starts when you play in the
left range of the keyboard, and stops when you release it.
This is useful for beginning players who
have difficulty playing in precise time. It is
also effective for creating accompani-
ment breaks during the performance.
To turn the function off, press SYNCHRO STOP again.
Getting Help With Chords .........................................................................
The CHORD ASSIST function in the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
display uses the keyboard guide lamps to show you appropriate
fingerings for chords.
Chord Assistance
The Chord Assistance feature is essen-
tially an electronic chord book that
shows you appropriate fingerings for
chords; it is useful when you want to
quickly learn how to play certain chords.
Simply specify the desired chord via the
display, and the fingerings for the Fin-
gered 1 method are indicated by the
keyboard guide lamps.
Z Turn the Chord Assistance function on.
If the [ACMP ON] button is off, it will
turn on.
If the split point is set below F
#
2, it will
automatically be reset to F
#
2.
The keyboard guide lamps do not
indicate the split point when Chord
Assistance is on, since they are used
to indicate chord fingerings instead.
Press the CHORD ASSIST button.
The CHORD ASSIST display appears, and the accompaniment
mode automatically changes to Fingered 1.
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
60
63
CVP-202
X Start the Auto Accompaniment.
Press [START/STOP] or use the Synchronized Start function (page
53) to start the Auto Accompaniment.
C Enter the chord root.
ROOT function
Settings: See sidebar on page 60.
Use the ROOT button to select a root.
The ROOT function is highlighted, and the root changes.
If you hold the ROOT button down, the
INVERT setting may also change.
When the ROOT function is highlighted, you can also use the data
dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a root.
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
When the TYPE function is highlighted, you can also use the data dial
or the [–] and [+] buttons to select a chord type.
The following chord types can be specified in the display:
Major [Maj]
Minor [m]
Seventh [7]
Minor seventh [m7]
Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)]
Sixth [6]
Minor sixth [m6]
Major seventh [M7]
Suspended fourth [sus4]
Augmented [aug]
Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)]
Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]
Seventh augmented [7 (#5)]
Diminished seventh [dim7]
Flatted fifth [(b5)]
Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)]
Minor major seventh [mM7]
TYPE function
Settings: See list at left.
Use the TYPE and buttons to select a chord type.
The TYPE function is highlighted, and the type changes.
V Enter the chord type.
B Rotate the fingering as desired.
Press INVERT to shift the fingering down the keyboard. Each time
the INVERT button is pressed, the next viable fingering for the chord
appears. The INVERT function displays the inversion number.
61
64
CVP-202
N Enter the chord.
Any chords recognized in Fingered 1
mode can be entered from the key-
board.
The Clavinova displays the name of
the chord recognized from the key-
board at the left edge of the LCD dis-
play, under the tempo. You can com-
pare this chord root and type displayed
by the ROOT and TYPE functions to
make sure youre fingering the chord
correctly. When the root of the chord
being played corresponds to one of the
black keys on the keyboard, the root
may be displayed as either flat or
sharp; for example, B
b
may also be
displayed as A
#
(see the sidebar on
page 60 for details).
A flashing keyboard guide lamp indi-
cates a note which may be omitted.
The keyboard guide lamps indicate the fingering for the selected
chord. At this point you can either play the chord on the keyboard or
press the ENTER button to hear the accompaniment play it.
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
M Stop the Auto Accompaniment.
When you’re done with Chord Assistance, press [START/STOP] or
[ENDING] to stop the accompaniment.
< Turn Chord Assistance off.
To turn Chord Assistance off, press [EXIT] or [ACMP ON].
The main display appears. If you press [ACMP ON], the Auto Ac-
companiment is turned off at the same time.
SPLIT POINT function
Settings: Any key of the keyboard
Basic setting: F
#
2
Use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to change the split point.
Press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore the basic setting.
The split point cannot be set when Full
Keyboard mode is selected.
Changing the split point here also
changes it for the Split mode (see
page 39).
The selected key name is displayed by the SPLIT POINT function.
F 2
C3 C4 C5 C6 C7C2C1C0
Right range
Left range
If the Auto Accompaniment or the Split mode (page 36) is on, the
keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected split point lights.
Changing the Split Point ............................................................................
You can use the SPLIT POINT function in the ACCOMPANIMENT
MODE display to set the split point at any desired key position. The keys
to the left of (and including) the split point control the chords played by
the Auto Accompaniment in every accompaniment mode except Full
Keyboard.
62
65
CVP-202
The Clavinova has five accompaniment parts: Rhythm, Bass, Chord,
Pad, and Phrase.
Adjusting Individual Part Levels
The overall accompaniment playback
volume can be adjusted using the
[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider.
By adjusting the volume balance of the
various parts, or setting the volume of
some parts to 0, you can create varia-
tions on the basic style accompani-
ment.
Some styles may not use all five ac-
companiment parts.
You can also adjust the level of reverb
that is applied to the Auto Accompani-
ment parts. See page 43 for details.
The volume settings for the five accompaniment parts can be adjusted
individually in the MIXER display page.
Part volume relationships
The volume level of each Auto Accom-
paniment part is relative to the [ACMP/
SONG VOLUME] setting.
The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] setting
is relative to the [MASTER VOLUME]
setting.
Z Press the [MIXER] button........................................................................
The lamp lights, and the MIXER page appears.
X Select a part. ..........................................................................................................
Press the LCD button for the part whose level you want to set.
RHYTHM
This part forms the basis of the accompaniment. The Rhythm
part usually plays one of the drum kits.
BASS
The Bass part uses voices appropriate to each style, including
acoustic bass and synth bass.
CHORD
The Chord part provides appropriate rhythmic chordal accompa-
niment for each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal
instruments here.
PAD
The Pad part plays long chords where necessary, using sus-
tained instruments such as strings, organ, and choir.
PHRASE
The Phrase part is used for embellishments such as punchy
brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the
accompaniment more interesting.
The selected function is highlighted.
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
63
MIXER
FUNCTION
66
CVP-202
Playing with the Auto Accompaniment
C Set the volume level. .....................................................................................
Part volume levels
Range: 0 (min.) — 127 (max.)
Basic setting: 110
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to adjust the volume level. You
can also increase the level by holding down the button you used to select
the part.
You can set the volume of the highlighted part to 0 by pressing and
quickly releasing its button. Press and release the button a second time to
restore the previous value.
To reset the highlighted part’s volume to the basic setting of 110,
simultaneously press the [–] and [+] buttons.
V Repeat steps Xand C. ..............................................................................
Repeat the preceding steps to set the level for other parts. (You can
also select several parts and adjust their volume settings simultaneously.)
B Exit the MIXER display. ..............................................................................
To exit the function, press the [MIXER] button again, or press
[EXIT].
The lamp turns off, and the main display appears.
64
MIXER
FUNCTION
EXIT
67
CVP-202
The Clavinova has many other features and functions that make
the use of the Auto Accompaniment even more convenient and
enjoyable. With these functions you can easily select panel
settings to suit a certain type of music, have the Clavinova play
harmony to your melody line.
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
The Clavinova’s built-in Music Database gives you a convenient way
to select the style, voice, and effect settings that will suit a particular type
of music. Just select one of the 463 entries in the Music Database; the
Clavinova does the rest!
For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 11 of the
Data List.
Z Display the Music Database. ................................................................
Music Database
When you display the Music Database,
the Clavinova automatically recalls a
panel setup that uses the current style.
(The name of this setup is highlighted
in the Music Database display.) If you
want to use the selected setup, you
can simply skip to step 4 of this proce-
dure.
The Automatic Accompaniment also
turns on when you display the Music
Database. If you access the Music
Database before starting the style, the
Synchronized Start function (page 53)
is also turned on.
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
The lamp lights, and the MUSIC DATABASE display appears.
The MUSIC DATABASE display contains a listing of panel setups that
can be sorted either by style or alphabetically. The name of the style that is
used by the currently highlighted setup is shown at the upper right edge of
the display.
65
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONY
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONY
Highlighted
setup
Style name
68
CVP-202
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
X Sort the list, if necessary. ........................................................................
To display the panel setups for a specific
style group, simply press the correspond-
ing STYLE button. The menu is automati-
cally sorted by style, and a panel setup
that uses the currently selected style in
the chosen group is highlighted.
Press the SORT button to switch the highlighted setting between
STYLE and A–Z.
C Select and recall a panel setup.........................................................
The Harmony function will not be turned
on if the Full Keyboard mode is selected,
even if the selected Music Database
setup includes “Harmony On.”
Use the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons to highlight the desired
panel setup in the Music Database list, then press the SET button to recall
the highlighted setup.
The style, voice, and effect settings change automatically.
Once you have selected a panel setup from the Music Database, you
can change the style, voice and effect settings to suit your preferences.
You can also use the Registration function (page 89) to save the panel
setup in the Clavinova’s memory.
V Return to the main display. ....................................................................
Press [EXIT] to exit the Music Database menu display.
The previous display appears.
When STYLE is highlighted, the menu list is sorted by style, and a
panel setup that uses the currently selected style is highlighted.
When A–Z is highlighted, the menu is sorted alphabetically.
B Turn off the Music Database. ...............................................................
When you’re done using the Music Database setup, press the [MU-
SIC DATABASE] button again.
The [MUSIC DATABASE] lamp turns off, and the panel settings
you were using before you accessed the Music Database are re-
stored.
66
69
CVP-202
Harmony
This feature adds harmony or embellishment notes to the melody you
play using the main voice in the right range of the keyboard. The har-
mony notes are produced automatically to match chords played with
Auto Accompaniment.
Adding Harmony .................................................................................................
Since the Harmony function can be turned on and off while playing,
you can add “spice” and professional polish to your performance by ap-
plying harmony to selected phrases as you play.
Z Turn the Harmony function on.
The Harmony feature cannot be turned
on when Full Keyboard is selected as
the accompaniment mode (page 59).
The Harmony feature can be used
while playing back the intro or ending,
or while the Auto Accompaniment is
off, if one of the following harmony
types (page 70) is selected: Octave,
1+5, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill.
Press the [HARMONY] button.
The lamp lights.
X Play the keyboard.
Play the keyboard along with the Auto Accompaniment.
With some Harmony types the voice
used for the Harmony will be different
from the currently selected main voice.
When chords are played in the right-
hand section of the keyboard, the
harmony will be applied to the last note
played.
C Turn the Harmony function off.
Using the Pedals
If you set the LEFT PEDAL function to
HARMONY (page 138), the Clavinova
will play harmony only while the left
pedal is pressed.
If you use the left pedal to control the
harmony, that pedal will have no effect
when the Harmony function is off (i.e.,
when the [HARMONY] lamp is not lit).
Press the [HARMONY] button again.
The lamp turns off.
Displaying the Harmony Settings.....................................................
You can change the harmony type, the volume of the harmony voice,
and other harmony settings in the HARMONY display page.
To display the HARMONY page, press [DIRECT ACCESS], then
[HARMONY].
The HARMONY display appears.
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
67
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONY
DIRECT ACCESS
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONY
70
CVP-202
Selecting a Harmony Type ........................................................................
You can change the type of harmony that is played using the TYPE
function in the HARMONY display.
TYPE function
Settings: See table on this page.
Basic setting: Depends on main voice.
Use the TYPE and buttons to select a harmony type, or select
the TYPE function and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
Some harmony types (indicated by a
” in the Speed column of the table at
left) have a speed setting that can be
adjusted. See the next topic for details.
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
68
Type Speed
Duet
Trio
Block
4 Part
Country
Octave
1+5
Echo
Tremolo
Trill
Strumming
Add Jazz Gtr
Add Brass
Add Strings
In The Forest
Harmony Types
The selected harmony type is highlighted.
To restore the basic setting for the currently selected main voice,
press the TYPE and buttons or the [–] and [+] buttons simultane-
ously.
Since the basic setting of the TYPE function depends on the currently
selected main voice, a different harmony type may be selected automati-
cally if you change the main voice selection.
71
CVP-202
Changing the Harmony Speed.............................................................
You can change the speed of the harmony notes played by the Echo,
Tremolo, and Trill harmony types using the SPEED function in the
HARMONY display.
SPEED function
Settings: 4, 6, 8, 12 (Echo)
8, 12, 16, 32 (Tremolo)
12, 16, 24, 32 (Trill)
Basic setting: Depends on main voice.
Z Select the SPEED function.
Press the LCD button under the SPEED function.
The SPEED function is highlighted.
X Change the SPEED setting.
Use the SPEED button, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to
change the value of the SPEED function.
Changing the Harmony Volume ..........................................................
You can change the volume of the harmony notes using the VOLUME
function in the HARMONY display.
VOLUME function
Settings: 0 (min.) — 127 (max.)
Basic setting: Depends on main voice.
Z Select the VOLUME function.
Press the one of the LCD buttons under the VOLUME function.
The VOLUME function is highlighted.
X Change the VOLUME setting.
Use the VOLUME and buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+]
buttons to change the value of the VOLUME function.
To restore the VOLUME function to its basic setting for the currently
selected main voice, press the VOLUME and buttons or the [–]
and [+] buttons simultaneously.
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
69
72
CVP-202
One Touch Setting
Other Auto Accompaniment Functions
The Clavinova’s convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy
for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style you’re
playing. Each style has four preprogrammed panel setups that you can
select by pressing a single button.
For a list of the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to page 11 of the
Data List.
The One Touch Setting function cannot
be used with styles in the [DISK/CUS-
TOM] group.
Z Select a style.........................................................................................................
Select the desired style in the normal way (see page 49).
X Make sure the ONE TOUCH SETTING function is on.
If necessary, press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button.
The [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button lamp lights.
C Select a panel setup......................................................................................
When you select a panel setup, the
Auto Accompaniment turns on auto-
matically. If you select a panel setup
before starting the style, the Synchro-
nized Start function (page 53) will also
turn on.
The Harmony function will not be
turned on if the Full Keyboard mode is
selected, even if the selected One
Touch Setting setup includes “Har-
mony On.”
Press one of the four numbered buttons under REGISTRATION/ONE
TOUCH SETTING.
The voice and effect settings change automatically.
Once you have selected a panel setup using the One Touch Setting
function, you can change the voice and effect settings to suit your prefer-
ences. You can also use the Registration function (page 89) to save the
panel setup in the Clavinova’s memory.
70
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
The Clavinova’s pre-programmed factory
default panel settings can be stored in a
registration memory to allow easy recall
of the pre-programmed panel settings.
Using the REGISTRATION function,
register the factory default settings (the
preprogrammed settings initially present
when the Clavinova’s power is first turned
on) to [REGIST A-1] (see page 89). Now
when you select [A-1] all panel settings
will be conveniently returned to their
factory default settings.
73
CVP-202
The Clavinova lets you create custom accompaniment styles
that you can recall and play back at any time, just like the presets.
Up to four custom styles can be maintained in the Clavinova’s
memory at the same time, and any number can be saved to disk
for later reloading and use.
Creating Your Own Styles
Recording a Custom Style
Use the following procedure to record your own custom styles.
Z Select the DISK/CUSTOM style group.......................................
One temporary style (named
TEMP.STYLE) is automatically loaded
into the DISK/CUSTOM style memory
when the power is turned on.
If you have loaded other style data
(see page 87), you can select any of
the styles from the DISK/CUSTOM
STYLE menu to serve as the basis for
your new custom style.
Press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button.
The lamp lights, and the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display appears.
X Select the CUSTOM STYLE function. ............................................
Press the CUSTOM STYLE button.
71
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
74
CVP-202
Creating Your Own Styles
C Select a source style. ...................................................................................
Select a preset style that is close to the style you want to create. Preset
style selection is carried out in the normal way (page 49).
You can also use the style already selected in the DISK/CUSTOM
STYLE display as the basis for your new style, or select a different
DISK/CUSTOM style just as you would a preset style.
B Change the beat and section length. ..........................................
If you want to create a style with a different time signature than the
selected style, or change the number of measures in the selected section,
press the PAGE [>] button.
V Select the section you want to record. .....................................
In the CUSTOM STYLE display, the
variations and patterns that make up a
style are referred to as “sections.”
A custom style includes only one intro
section, one fill-in section, and one
ending section.
The custom style’s intro, fill-in, and
ending sections are based on the
corresponding patterns for the style
variation (MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, or
MAIN D) that was selected when the
CUSTOM STYLE button was pressed
(page 73).
In page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, press the SECT. button as
many times as necessary to display the section you want to record:
MAIN A, MAIN B, MAIN C, MAIN D, INTRO, FILL IN, or ENDING.
The SECT. function is highlighted, and each section is displayed in
turn. The Clavinova plays the currently displayed section repeatedly.
Page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display appears.
72
The “Select a source style” message is displayed for a few
seconds, then replaced by page 1 of the CUSTOM STYLE display.
The style that was selected in the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display
begins playing.
PIANIST styles cannot be used to
create a custom style.
75
CVP-202
BEAT function
Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5
Basic setting: Depends on style.
Press the BEAT button to select a different time signature.
The “Clear style? message is displayed.
Clear style?
Since the patterns of the selected
style will not match the new beat,
you will have to completely clear
the style and start recording from
scratch if you change the time
signature.
Press OK to clear the style, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style
has been cleared, you can use the BEAT button, the data dial, or
the [–] and [+] buttons to select a new time signature.
Creating Your Own Styles
Changing the beat:
73
Changing the section length:
MEAS. function
Settings: 1 — 8
Basic setting: Depends on style.
Press the MEAS. button to change the number of measures in the
current section.
The “Clear section? message is displayed.
Clear section?
You will have to clear all parts of the
currently selected section and start
recording from scratch if you change
the number of measures.
The “Clear section?” message will not
be displayed if you have already
cleared the section by changing the
beat, as described above.
Press OK to clear the section, or CANCEL to abort. Once the
style has been cleared, you can use the MEAS. button, the data
dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to set the section length.
When you’re done here:
Once the BEAT and/or MEAS. parameters have been set as re-
quired, press the PAGE [<] button to return to page 1 of the CUSTOM
STYLE display.
The length of the FILL IN section can
only be set to one measure.
76
CVP-202
The part number is highlighted. If you have selected a part other
than R1 or R2, the Clear part?” message will be displayed.
The R1 part is initially selected and set to
record.
Any part you select can be set to record by using the rightmost LCD
button to select REC after selecting the part.
R1 Rhythm 1
R2 Rhythm 2
Bs Bass
C1 Chord 1
C2 Chord 2
Pd Pad
P1 Phrase 1
P2 Phrase 2
Recording part
Only one part can be set to record.
All other parts will be set to PLAY (the
part number is surrounded by a box) or
OFF (only the part number is dis-
played).
Part containing no dataPlayback part
OFF
Clear part?
If the source style is a preset style or a
style loaded from an optional Style File
disk, parts other than R1 and R2 must
be cleared before they can be re-
corded.
The “Clear part?” message will not be
displayed if the selected part does not
contain any data.
Press OK to clear the part and continue, or CANCEL to abort.
The preset voice for the part being re-
corded is initially selected.
At this point you can also select the voice you want to record the part
with. Select the voice as you would the main keyboard voice (see page
29).
Part Voices that can be used
R1 Any drum or SFX kit in PERCUSSION group
R2 Any
Others Any except a drum kit or SFX kit
Creating Your Own Styles
74
N Select the part you want to record................................................
Use the PART LCD button, the data dial, or [–] and [+] buttons to
select the part you want to record.
M Select the voice for the part. .................................................................
77
CVP-202
< Record the selected part...................................................................
Playback of the custom style can be
started and stopped by pressing the
[START/STOP] button. (Data cannot
be recorded while playback is
stopped.)
All notes are automatically stopped at
the end of the style (i.e., at the point
between repeats when recording). It is
therefore not advisable to record over
this point.
You can now record new notes in the selected part by playing the
keyboard at the appropriate timing. Record non-percussion parts in C
major seventh (CM7), since the custom style is recorded as a C major
seventh pattern.
If you want to create a totally new part from scratch, press the
CLEAR LCD button to clear the selected part before beginning to
record. If both the R1 and R2 parts are cleared, the metronome will
sound to provide a timing guide. (The metronome sound is not re-
corded, and will stop as soon as the custom style is stored.)
Creating Your Own Styles
75
When recording a drum kit voice in part R1 or R2, you can clear a
single drum instrument from the part by pressing the key corresponding
to the instrument to be cleared while holding down the C1 key on the
keyboard. (The C1 key is labeled “CANCEL.”) The metronome timing
guide can also be cleared in this way.
Another useful recording aid is the SOLO LCD button: when this
button is pressed and highlighted, only the selected part will sound. Press
the SOLO button again to turn the solo function off and hear all parts in
the selected section.
78
CVP-202
? Repeat until the custom style is complete...........................
> Quantize the recorded part, if necessary. ..............................
You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by using the PART
QUANTIZE functions in page 2 of the CUSTOM STYLE display to
align all the notes to a specified beat. Press the PAGE [>] button to dis-
play the function, then press the middle LCD button to select the
quantize size:
Once the required quantize size has been selected, press the START
LCD button to quantize the current part. The part will begin to play using
the new timing, and the START button will change to UNDO, allowing
you to undo the quantize operation and return to the pre-quantized data if
the results are not as you expected. You will not be able to UNDO once
another button has been pressed.
During custom style recording, no MIXER
display is available.
Repeat steps 4 through 9 to record other parts for the currently se-
lected section.
Repeat steps 4 through 10 to record other sections, until all sections
have been recorded.
[ Name the custom style. .............................................................................
When your custom style is complete, use the PAGE buttons to select
page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the STYLE NAME
LCD button to display the NAME page.
Creating Your Own Styles
3
3
3
32nd notes
16th note triplets
16th notes
8th note triplets
8th notes
quarter-note triplets
quarter notes
76
79
CVP-202
Use the > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the charac-
ter you want to change (style names can be up to 12 characters in
length). Use the data dial and/or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the char-
acter you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then
press the CH.SET LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor
position. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The BACK
LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete the preceding
character.
When the name is complete, press OK to register the name for the
current custom style, or CANCEL to abort.
Creating Your Own Styles
77
Store the custom style. ..............................................................................
The current tempo setting at the time the
custom style is stored becomes the
preset tempo for that style.
Press the STORE LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM STYLE
display to store the current custom style in the Clavinova’s memory.
The Clavinova displays a message asking you to confirm your
decision to store the style.
Use the MEMORY No. and buttons, the data dial, or the [–]
and [+] buttons to select the memory number (1 through 4) where
you want to store the custom style, then press OK to store or
CANCEL to abort.
If the selected memory number already
contains a style, the style name will
appear next to the memory number. The
existing style will be overwritten when a
new style is stored.
80
CVP-202
In addition to the various functions described in the basic custom
style recording procedure, above, the CUSTOM STYLE display pages
include several other functions that you may find useful when creating
custom styles.
RECALL SECTION function......................................................................
This function makes it possible to recall the last-stored version of the
currently selected section (all parts of the section are recalled). Simply
press the RECALL SECTION LCD button in page 2 of the CUSTOM
STYLE display. If the Clavinova cannot recall the preceding operation
(i.e., after time signature has been changed), the “Can’t recall!” mes-
sage will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return to the previous
display.
Exit when done. ..................................................................................................
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the CUSTOM STYLE display and
return to the main display.
Other Custom Style Functions
STYLE CLEAR function .................................................................................
Press the STYLE CLEAR LCD button in page 3 of the CUSTOM
STYLE display to completely clear the current custom style. The “Are
you sure?” message will be displayed. Press YES to clear the style, or
NO to cancel the change.
Be Sure to Save Your Data!
Custom style data is not retained in memory when the power is turned
off, so be sure to save your custom style before turning the power off
(see page 82).
EXIT
78
Creating Your Own Styles
81
CVP-202
Volume and Effects.........................................................................................
Page 4 of the CUSTOM STYLE display includes several functions
that let you set the volume, reverb, chorus type and depth, and pan for
each part of each custom style section.
Z Select the section and part.
Use the SECT. function to select a section (or select ALL for all sec-
tions), and the PART function to select a part (or select ALL for all
parts).
X Select the parameter you want to set.
The third LCD button selects the parameter to be set for the current
section and part. Choose from VOLUME, REVERB, CHORUS, or
PAN.
C Select the chorus type.
If you selected CHORUS in step 2, the TYPE function is displayed
above the fourth LCD button. Use this function to select the chorus
type you want to apply to the current section and part.
Chorus Type List
CHORUS 1
CHORUS 2
CHORUS 3
CELESTE 1
CELESTE 2
CELESTE 3
FLANGER 1
FLANGER 2
OFF
79
Creating Your Own Styles
82
CVP-202
V Set the value or depth of the selected parameter.
The reverb type used for the custom
style are determined by the style that
was selected as the basis for custom
style creation.
Normally the VALUE and chorus TYPE
settings from the preset style are ini-
tially selected. If the PART function is
set to ALL, the preset values for part
R1 are displayed. If the SECTION
function is set to ALL, the preset val-
ues for MAIN A are displayed.
The word OTHERS may appear as
the chorus type if the preset style uses
a chorus type other than those in the
list. The OTHERS setting cannot be re-
selected once you select a different
chorus type.
The VALUE (or DEPTH) function displayed above the rightmost
LCD button sets the amount or depth for the parameter selected in
step 2.
When VOLUME is selected, the SECTION setting is fixed at ALL
and the VALUE range is from –50 to +50 (this value is relative to
the preset volume of the source style). When the REVERB or CHO-
RUS parameter is selected, the DEPTH can be set in a range from 0
to 127. When PAN is selected, the VALUE function can be set in a
range from L10 (full left) to C (center) to R10 (full right).
B Repeat as necessary.
Repeat the preceding steps to set other parameters for each part and
section in the custom style.
Saving Styles to Disk ...................................................................................
Page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display lets you save custom styles
on a disk. You can save custom styles individually, or in a complete set of
up to four styles.
After inserting a properly formatted disk (page 111) in the Clavinova’s
disk drive, use the MEMORY No. and buttons to select the custom
style you want to save to disk, or select ALL to save a complete set of up
to four custom styles. When this is done, press the SAVE LCD button to
start saving the data to disk. At this point the SAVE display appears.
Enter a name for the style file. The procedure for entering the
filename is the same as that used to enter a name for a custom style (page
140). Press SAVE when the name has been entered. If a file with the
same name already exists, the “Same name! Overwrite? mes-
sage will be displayed. Press OK to overwrite the existing file, or CAN-
CEL to abort the save operation.
80
Creating Your Own Styles
83
CVP-202
Custom styles must be stored in the Clavinova’s memory before they
can be saved to a disk. If a custom style has not been stored and you at-
tempt to save it to disk, the “Store in memory before saving
to disk” message will be displayed. If this happens, press OK to return
to page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display. Store the custom style (see
step 12 on page 79), then try saving again.
Deleting Style Files .........................................................................................
Style files can also be deleted from a disk using the DELETE func-
tion on page 5 of the CUSTOM STYLE display.
After inserting a disk that contains style files in the Clavinova disk
drive, press the DELETE LCD button. Use the FILE and buttons to
select the style file you want to delete from the disk. The Are you
sure?” message will be displayed. Press YES to delete the style file, or
NO to cancel.
Exiting Custom Style Mode ...................................................................
Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode and return to
the main display.
Style files can be loaded from disk using
the ALL LOAD and SINGLE LOAD func-
tions, as described in the Loading Style
Files section (page 86).
81
Creating Your Own Styles
84
CVP-202
Once created, your original custom styles can be selected for play-
back by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the STYLE
and LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select
the custom style you want to play. The selected style can then be played
in exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 51).
Playing Back Your Custom Styles
Since only one intro pattern, one fill-in
pattern, and one ending pattern can be
recorded for each custom style, no intro,
fill-in, or ending variations are produced
during playback.
The following messages may appear when creating and storing a style
in Custom Style mode.
Memory Full During Recording .........................................................
This message will be displayed if the memory becomes full during
recording or editing.
Messages in Custom Style Mode
Press OK to return to the CUSTOM STYLE display, then simplify the
style by clearing a part, etc.
Insufficient Memory To Store ...............................................................
This message will be displayed if there is not enough memory to per-
form a store operation.
In this case it will be necessary to either delete a style you don’t need,
or simplify the style you are currently recording. Press CANCEL to re-
turn to the CUSTOM STYLE display and simplify the current style (by
clearing a part, etc.), or DELETE to delete one or more styles.
If you select the DELETE function, the “Select style to de-
lete” message will be displayed:
The amount of memory being used by
each style is displayed next to the style
name (in approximate kilobytes). You can
refer to this amount to judge how much
memory (out of the total 100 KB) will
become available when a particular style
is deleted.
82
Creating Your Own Styles
85
CVP-202
Use the MEMORY No. and buttons to select the style you
want to delete, then press OK to delete the style, or CANCEL to cancel
the operation.
If the Clavinova displays the “Can’t delete this style!” mes-
sage when you try to delete a style, it is because you have tried to delete
the style that your custom style was based on. If this happens, press OK
to return to the “Select style to delete” display, then select a dif-
ferent style to delete.
Exit Before Store ...............................................................................................
If you press [EXIT] button to exit the Custom Style mode before
storing the style, the Clavinova will display a message like the one
shown below:
Select a memory number and press YES to store the style and exit,
press NO to exit without storing the style, or press CANCEL to return to
the Custom Style mode.
Style Change Before Store.....................................................................
If you want to select a different source
style without storing the current style, exit
the Custom Style mode without storing
the style (see Exit Before Store above),
then re-enter the Custom Style mode.
If you attempt to select a different source style before storing the style
you’ve just edited, the following display will appear:
Select a memory number and press OK to store the style and select a
new source style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode.
83
Creating Your Own Styles
86
CVP-202
You can load and play style files created in the Style File Format
either from optional Yamaha “Style File” disks, or from disks
containing custom style files you’ve created yourself.
Using Style Files
The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original auto-accompaniment for-
mat, which has evolved through years of development and refinement.
The Style File Format features a unique conversion system that allows
you to play exceptionally high-quality accompaniments with a variety of
chord types. In addition to the internal styles, the Style File Format lets
you use other sophisticated styles from optional Style File disks, as well
as styles that were created and saved to disk in the Custom Style mode.
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME R ESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
DISK
CUSTOM
About the Yamaha Style File Format
Style files created for Clavinova models
prior to the CVP-202 may have slightly
different formats. If you try loading such
files, the data may not play back as
expected. (This also applies to the use of
CVP-202 style data by earlier-model
Clavinovas.)
Loading Styles from a Disk
Z Insert a disk............................................................................................................
If a disk containing both song data and
style files is inserted, the SONG PLAY
display will automatically appear. If this
happens, press the [SONG] button or the
[EXIT] button to return to the main dis-
play, then press the [DISK/CUSTOM]
button.
Insert a disk containing style files into the disk drive. The [DISK IN
USE] lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the
disk. When a Style File disk is inserted, the STYLE FILE LOAD display
(see step 2 below) will appear automatically.
If the disk is already inserted and the STYLE FILE LOAD display is
not showing, press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button to open the DISK/
CUSTOM STYLE display, then press the LOAD SINGLE button.
D
IS
K
IN
U
S
E
To load a set of four style files that was created by selecting ALL as
the memory number when the files were saved in Custom Style mode (see
page 82), press the ALL LOAD LCD button rather than the LOAD SIN-
GLE button.
84
87
CVP-202
X Select a style file...............................................................................................
If a tempo is set prior to loading the
style, that tempo becomes the default
for the loaded style.
Some styles are too large to preview
with the LISTEN function. In this case
the Too much data for LISTEN func-
tion! Please load data. message will
be displayed. If this happens, load the
style directly as in step 4.
The Auto Accompaniment is automati-
cally turned on when the LOAD SIN-
GLE button is pressed, and the style is
played back automatically with the
Auto Accompaniment in C Major when
the LISTEN LCD button is pressed.
You can change the chord or try play-
ing on the keyboard while previewing a
style.
Select the desired style using the data dial or the [–] and [+] buttons.
You can preview the selected style by pressing the LISTEN LCD
button. (The LISTEN function is not available in the ALL LOAD dis-
play.) To stop listening, press the LISTEN LCD button again, or press
the [START/STOP] button.
If the selected memory number already
contains a style, the name of that style
will appear above the MEMORY and
LOAD functions in the display. The
existing style will be overwritten when
a new style is loaded. (One pre-pro-
grammed temporary style is automati-
cally loaded into the [DISK/CUSTOM]
memory whenever the power is turned
on.)
Use the MEMORY LCD button to select the memory number to
which the selected style file is to be loaded (1 through 4), then press the
LOAD LCD button to load the style file.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select and load other style files.
Using Style
C Select a memory number and load the style. ....................
It is not necessary to select a memory number when ALL LOAD is
selected in step 1. Simply press OK to load or CANCEL to abort.
If there is not enough memory to load the specified style file, the
Not enough memory! Delete an unneeded style?” mes-
sage will be displayed. In this case it will be necessary to delete a style
you don’t need before loading the new style. Use the MEMORY No.
and buttons to select the number of the style you want to delete, then
press DELETE to delete the style, or CANCEL to abort.
The ALL LOAD display is as follows:
When ALL LOAD is executed, all data
in the four memories will be replaced
by new data.
The amount of memory being used by
each style is displayed next to the style
name (in approximate kilobytes). You
can refer to this amount to judge how
much memory (out of the total 100 KB)
will become available when a particular
style is deleted.
85
88
CVP-202
Playing Loaded Style Files
Using Style Files
V Eject the disk when you’re done. ....................................................
CAUTION
The [DISK IN USE] lamp will light while
the style is being loaded. NEVER
attempt to remove a disk while the
[DISK IN USE] lamp is lit.
The LISTEN, LOAD, [EXIT], and STYLE
buttons will not function while the style
data is being loaded (i.e., while the [DISK
IN USE] lamp is lit).
When you’ve finished with the Style File disk, press the disk drive
EJECT button to remove it and return to the normal play mode display.
You can return to the normal play mode without removing the disk by
pressing the [EXIT] button.
Loaded disk styles will be retained in
memory only until the power is turned off.
Once loaded, style files can be selected for playback by pressing the
[DISK/CUSTOM] button, then using the STYLE and LCD but-
tons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the style you want
to play. The selected style can then be played in exactly the same way as
the preset styles (page 51).
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
86
89
CVP-202
The Registration feature lets you store complete panel setups
that you can recall whenever needed. A total of 20 setups (5
banks containing 4 memories each) can be registered in the
Clavinova’s memory.
CHAPTER 6: Registrations
Using Registrations
(Registering and Recalling Panel Setups)
Use the following procedure to store a panel setup as a registration in
the Clavinova’s memory.
Z Set up the controls as needed............................................................
For a list of the settings that are memorized by the Registration func-
tion, refer to page 11 of the Data List.
Storing a Panel Setup
Registration bank
Range: A — E
Basic setting: A
Use the [BANK +] and [BANK –] buttons to select the desired bank.
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
The selected bank is displayed in the upper left corner of main
display.
X Select a registration bank........................................................................
Registration bank
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
87
90
CVP-202
C Register the panel setup. ..........................................................................
Registration Memory
Range: 1 — 4 (each bank)
Basic setting: None
While holding down the [REGISTRATION] button, press one of the
buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRATION/ONE TOUCH
SETTING corresponding to the registration memory where you want to
save the setup.
The number of the selected registration memory appears next to
the bank name in the upper left corner of the main display. The
panel settings that were previously stored in the selected registra-
tion are cleared and replaced by the new settings.
Pre-programmed settings are initially
stored in all registration memories
when the Clavinova’s power is first
turned on.
By default, the registration settings are
preserved even when the Clavinova’s
power is turned off (see page 152).
You can also save individual registra-
tions (or complete sets of 20 registra-
tions) to floppy disk for future recall
(see page 139).
Recalling the Registered Panel Settings
Z Press the [REGISTRATION] button...............................................
The [REGISTRATION] lamp lights.
X Select a bank. .......................................................................................................
Use the [BANK +] and [BANK –] buttons to select the bank that con-
tains the desired registration.
The selected bank is displayed in the upper left corner of the main
display.
C Select a registration.
Press one of the buttons labeled [1] through [4] under REGISTRA-
TION/ONE TOUCH SETTING corresponding to the registration
memory you want to recall.
Registration number
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
88
Using Registrations
91
CVP-202
The number of the recalled registration appears next to the
bank name in the upper left corner of in the main display.
A pencil icon will appear to the right of the registration number
in the display as soon as any change is made to the panel buttons or
settings. The pencil icon is displayed to remind you that the current
panel settings are different from those stored by the Registration
function.
Registered panel settings are not recalled
when a bank is selected. The settings are
recalled only when one of the numbered
buttons ([1] through [4]) is pressed.
When the LEFT PEDAL function is set to
REGISTRATION (see page 138), the left
pedal can be used to select the registration
memories in sequential order (A1 through
E4), letting you recall a different registration
each time the pedal is pressed. However,
other left pedal settings saved by the Regis-
tration function cannot be recalled in this
case.
You can use the Registration Freeze function to prevent certain panel
settings from being changed when a Registration is recalled. This allows
you to recall various registrations while using the Auto Accompaniment
without suddenly changing the style or volume settings.
Z Open the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display. .....................
Protecting Panel Settings
For a list of the settings in each freeze
category, see page 11 in the Data List.
Press [DIRECT ACCESS], then [REGISTRATION].
The REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display appears.
Categories to be frozen are marked by an asterisk (*) in the menu
listing. Also, the ON setting (in the ON/OFF function over the middle
LCD button) is highlighted when a category to be frozen is selected.
Freeze categories
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
34
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
DIRECT ACCESS
Edit symbol
89
Using Registrations
The Clavinova’s pre-programmed factory
default panel settings can be stored in a regis-
tration memory to allow easy recall of the pre-
programmed panel settings. Using the REG-
ISTRATION function, register the factory
default settings (the preprogrammed settings
initially present when the Clavinova’s power is
first turned on) to [REGIST A-1] (see page
89). Now when you select [A-1] all panel
settings will be conveniently returned to their
factory default settings.
92
CVP-202
X Indicate the categories to be frozen. ............................................
Freeze Categories
Settings: ON, OFF
Basic setting: ON (ACMP SETTING)
OFF (others)
Backup of last settings: ON
Use the and buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] buttons to
select a category, then press the ON/OFF button to mark or unmark the
selected category.
C Turn the Freeze function on or off.................................................
Press the FREEZE LCD button to freeze or unfreeze the categories
you marked in step 2.
FREEZE
Settings: ON (highlighted),
OFF (unhighlighted)
Basic setting: OFF
Backup of last setting: ON
To exit the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display and return to the
main display, press [EXIT].
The FREEZE function is highlighted when the marked categories
are frozen. When the Freeze function is off, the settings in all cat-
egories are not protected.
V Exit the display. ...................................................................................................
Repeat this step to mark or unmark other categories, as needed.
90
Using Registrations
93
CVP-202
D
I
S
K
IN
U
S
E
CHAPTER 7: Song Control
Song Playback
The Clavinova can play back songs recorded using the Song
Record function (page 110), as well as song data included on
various commercially available software disks. You can also play
along on the keyboard as the songs play back. Moreover, when
song data software includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics in the
display during playback.
See “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” (page 9)
for information on using floppy disks.
The Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs recorded on a single disk.
Any songs exceeding this number will not be available for playback.
Playback data is normally not output via MIDI. However, you can set
the Clavinova to output song data using the Song Transmission func-
tion in the FUNCTION [MIDI 4] display (page 150).
In addition to songs you’ve recorded yourself, the CVP-202 can play
back commercially available disks of Yamaha DOC software, XG soft-
ware, and Disklavier PianoSoft as well as GM software. See “Playing
Other Types of Music Data” on page 104.
Consult your Yamaha dealer for information on song data that is com-
patible with the Lyric Display function of the Clavinova.
Z Enter the Song Play mode. .................................................................
Gently insert the included “Music Software Collection” disk or a
disk containing songs you’ve recorded yourself into the disk drive.
Make sure to insert the disk face up in correct direction, as shown in
the illustration, until it clicks into place. The Song Play mode is auto-
matically called up when a song disk is inserted in the disk drive.
Song Playback
The Song Play mode is not automatically
engaged if the disk is inserted when one of
the disk-related FUNCTION displays (page
139) or the CUSTOM STYLE display (page
74) is showing.
91
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
SON G
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
Sliding shutter
Label
The LCD screens used in this Owner’s Manual are for instuctional purposes only.
Song names, etc., will appear differently depending on the disk you use.
94
CVP-202
The DISK IN USE lamp lights while the Clavinova reads and iden-
tifies the disk. Once the disk has been identified, the SONG PLAY
[MAIN] display (display page 1) appears and the [SONG] lamp
lights.
If a song disk has been inserted but the Song Play mode is not en-
gaged, press the [SONG] button.
The [SONG] lamp lights. Press the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to
select the first page, if the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not
shown.
X Select a song number. ................................................................................
Select the desired song number for playback by using the SONG but-
ton, data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
The selected song number, name, current tempo and the file icon
which indicates the type of the file are displayed.
Song numbers 1 through 99 are dis-
played, including song numbers that
contain no song data. However, no song
names are displayed for song numbers
that contain no data.
Select “ALL” if you want all songs on the disk to be played in order.
Select “RANDOM” if you want all songs on the disk to be played at
random. For either selection “ALL” or “RANDOM” the songs will be
repeated until playback is stopped.
File Icons
There are four icons (shown below) that indicate the type of the file.
Refer to “MIDI and Data Compatibil-
ity” (page 172) for information on file
formats.
In some cases, icons may not be
shown for GM song files or song data
files recorded with other than the
CVP-202.
Song Playback
92
Icons File Type
XG/SMF format file
DOC/ESEQ format file
Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft or XG/ESEQ file
Song data recorded with the CVP-202
Current voice for the keyboard
Tempo
Selected song
number/name
File icon
95
CVP-202
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to call up the SONG PLAY
[LIST] display (display page 3), to view the entire list of the song names
in the disk. The desired song can be selected easily by using the data dial
or the [–] and [+] buttons. Up to eight song titles are shown in the display
at a time. If more songs are on the disk, the next eight titles will appear
when you scroll past the last title shown in the display.
When nothing appears in the song
name location…
This indicates that there is no song data
for this song number.
Repeat Playback from a Specific Song
If you first select ALL in the SONG PLAY
[MAIN] display, and then select a song in
the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display
page 3), all songs will be repeatedly
played back starting from the selected
song.
Repeat Playback of a Single Song
If you select a song in the SONG PLAY
[MAIN] display or in the SONG PLAY
[LIST] display (display page 3), and then
select 1 SONG in the SONG PLAY [RE-
PEAT] display (display page 4), only the
selected song will be played back repeat-
edly until stopped.
C Start and stop playback. ............................................................................
Start playback of the selected song by pressing the [PLAY/STOP]
button.
Press the panel [PLAY/STOP] button to stop playback.
Song playback stops.
You can also stop playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
To exit the Song Play mode, press [SONG] or [EXIT]. The lamp
turns off and the previous display appears.
Voice Selection During Playback
The voice you play from the keyboard
can be changed during song playback by
selecting a voice in the normal way (page
29). The voices of the 1/RIGHT and 2/
LEFT parts being played back can be
changed in the SONG PLAY [L&R
VOICE] display (page 98).
Please note that the song may not start
immediately after you press [PLAY/
STOP].
Turning off the Keyboard Guide Lamp
The keyboard guide lamps corresponding
to the notes being played by the 1/RIGHT
and 2/LEFT parts will light in real time.
These guide lamps can be turned off in
the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display
(display page 5). (See page 109.)
Turning Off the Lyric Display
Lyrics are shown in the display when
playing back software which contains
lyric data. If you want to stop the lyrics
from appearing, you can disable this
function in page 5 of the SONG PLAY
[GUIDE MODE] display.
Using the Pedal to Start/Stop Playback
When you set the Left Pedal Function to
START/STOP in the FUNCTION
[PEDAL] display (display page 3), the left
pedal will function like the [START/
STOP] button. (See page 138.)
Song Playback
Playback of the selected song starts. Unless ALL or RANDOM has
been selected, the selected song will play through to the end, then
playback will stop automatically. The current measure number and
tempo will be shown in the display during playback.
You can also start playback of the selected song by pressing the
[START/STOP] button.
93
SON G REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
96
CVP-202
Adjusting the Tempo
The playback tempo of the song can be changed as desired. (See page
25.) The preset tempo for the selected song can be restored at any time
by simultaneously pressing the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons.
Usually the tempo is indicated by numbers. However in case of the
free tempo software, “- - -” will appear in place of the tempo in the dis-
play, and the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond
to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of
the song has been played back. The increase or decrease of the tempo
based on the basic tempo is indicated by a percentage figure in the dis-
play when the tempo is changed (from -99 to +99 at maximum; the range
differs depending on the software).
The BEAT lamps (page 52) may not
flash during playback of free-tempo
software.
With some songs, the displayed meas-
ure numbers may not match those
marked on the score.
VV
VV
V Eject the disk. .......................................................................................................
When you’ve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the
disk drive’s EJECT button to remove it.
The LCD display returns to the main display.
CAUTION
Never take out the disk while the DISK
IN USE lamp is lit or while a song is
being played back.
Volume Adjustment for Each Part
The volume of each part can be adjusted
in the MIXER display.
Adjusting the Level Balance of Song
Playback and the Keyboard Voices
Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control
(page 23) to adjust the volume.
When playing back a song recorded on
the CVP-202, the Auto Accompaniment
can be turned on by pressing the [ACMP
ON] button.
Song Playback
DISK IN USE
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
94
97
CVP-202
The 1/RIGHT (right hand), 2/LEFT (left hand) and ORCH (accom-
paniment) buttons in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display can be used to
turn playback of the corresponding parts on or off. The buttons are high-
lighted when the parts are turned on. For example, you can turn off the
right- and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard.
Parts can be switched on and off dur-
ing playback.
Parts not having any data cannot be
turned on. This applies when there is
actually no data in the assigned track
(page 98), or when the track assigned
to the 2/LEFT part is set to TRK --
(OFF).
The track assignment for each button can be changed in display page
6 of the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (page 98).
In the case of Yamaha Disklavier
PianoSoft files, DOC files and XG/ESEQ
files, the part indication does not appear
for the parts without data.
Turning Individual Accompaniment Parts On or Off
Normally, pressing the ORCH (accompaniment) LCD button turns all
orchestra parts (tracks 3 through 16) — or all parts other than 1/RIGHT
and 2/LEFT — on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on
or off individually in the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (display
page 2).
Z Select the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] page.
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the SONG PLAY
[TRACK PLAY] display (display page 2).
Tracks which contain data are indicated above the TRACK < and
> buttons. Tracks enabled for playback are indicated by a box sur-
rounding the track number. Tracks which do not contain data are
not displayed.
All track numbers may appear whether,
the tracks contain data or not, when a
Standard MIDI file song is selected
(except songs recorded on the CVP-
202).
Song Playback
95
In this example, 1/RIGHT is canceled.
Part Cancel
98
CVP-202
X Select the desired track for playback (PLAY/OFF, SOLO).
Select the track by using the TRACK < and > buttons, the data dial,
or the [–] and [+] buttons.
The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.
Turn playback on or off for the selected track by pressing the
rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback) or OFF.
When a track is muted, the box surrounding the track number disap-
pears. The voice used by the currently selected track is shown above
PLAY/OFF.
Select a track, then press and highlight the SOLO LCD button to hear
only the selected track. Press the SOLO LCD button again to cancel
the Solo function.
Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment
Assigning Tracks to
1/RIGHT1/RIGHT
1/RIGHT1/RIGHT
1/RIGHT and
2/LEFT2/LEFT
2/LEFT2/LEFT
2/LEFT.............................
Specific tracks can be assigned to the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT func-
tions in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display, allowing you to selectively
turn playback of assigned tracks on or off. TRK - - (OFF) can be as-
signed to 2/LEFT. The same track cannot be assigned to both parts.
1/RIGHT
Settings: 1 16
Basic setting: Depends on file type.
2/LEFT
Settings: 1 16, -- (off)
Basic setting: Depends on file type.
Select the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display (display page 6) by
using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.
Press the 1/RIGHT button or the 2/LEFT button to highlight the
corresponding function in the display, then use the data dial or [–]
and [+] buttons to assign the desired track.
You can also select the track by pressing the 1/RIGHT or 2/LEFT
button.
Tracks can only be assigned when play-
back is stopped at the top of the song.
Song Playback
96
The track assignments of DOC files and
Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft files are
fixed, and therefore cannot be changed.
99
CVP-202
The playback voice can only be changed
when playback is stopped at the top of
the song.
Selecting Voices for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT Parts
The playback voices for the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts can be se-
lected in the SONG PLAY [L&R VOICE] display.
Press L&R VOICE or to highlight the corresponding function in
the display, then select the playback voice for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT
parts by using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
You can also select a voice by using the L&R VOICE or .
The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider can be used to control the
overall volume of song playback.
When you enter the Song Play mode, the song volume level is auto-
matically set to the volume level that was last set in the Song Play mode,
regardless of the slider’s position. After that, moving the slider will set
the volume to the corresponding level.
Overall Song Playback Volume Control
If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on
during playback of an original song that
was recorded on the CVP-202, the
[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control will
affect the level of the Auto Accompani-
ment rather than that of song playback.
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
VOLUME
Song Playback
97
100
CVP-202
Z Select the track to be changed. ........................................................
Select the desired track by pressing TRACK < or >. Selecting TO-
TAL will change the overall settings of the song rather than the settings
of individual tracks.
Press the rightmost LCD button to select PLAY (playback), OFF, or
SOLO for the selected track. Select SOLO if you want to play only the
selected track.
Changing Settings in the MIXER Display
Song Playback
98
To adjust the playback volume, voice, and pan settings, as well as the
reverb, chorus, and effect depth for individual tracks, press the [MIXER]
button while in the Song Play mode to call up the MIXER display.
Adjustment of Track Settings
You can use the MIXER display to set the parameters listed below.
See the indicated reference pages for descriptions of each parameter.
Parameters available in the MIXER display
When track 1 — 16 is selected:
• VOLUME (See page 32.)
• VOICE (See page 29.)
• PAN (See page 32.)
• REVERB DEPTH (See page 43.)
• CHORUS DEPTH (See page 45.)
• EFFECT DEPTH (See page 48.)
When TOTAL is selected:
• TEMPO (See page 25.)
• Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 42.)
• REVERB TYPE (See page 42.)
• CHORUS TYPE (See page 44.)
• EFFECT TYPE (See page 47.)
The Program Change Number (PRG#),
Bank LSB (BKL), and Bank MSB (BKM)
parameters, which are used to select
voices via MIDI, are displayed when
VOICE is selected.
Depending on the file type, some param-
eters cannot be changed. For such pa-
rameters, a Fixed indication is shown.
MIXER
FUNCTION
101
CVP-202
X Select the parameter to be edited. .................................................
Press SELECT or to select the desired parameter.
Current value for
the selected track
Depending on the file type, voice
changes may only be possible for tracks
1 and 2.
C Edit the value or setting............................................................................
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the value or setting.
You can make changes to the parameters while the song is playing back,
letting you immediately hear the results of your edits.
Selecting TOTAL and changing the
REVERB DEPTH value will also affect
the sound of your keyboard perform-
ance.
The voices of tracks to which Auto
Accompaniment, rhythm, and harmony
data have been recorded can also be
changed.
Volume range: 0 127
If another song is selected, all settings
will return to the basic settings for the
song (or the settings used to record
the song).
If the Auto Accompaniment is turned
on during playback of an original song
that was recorded on the CVP-202, the
MIXER display will function as Auto
Accompaniment Part Volume Control
(page 65) instead of Song Track
Volume Control.
Parameter selected
for editing
Song Playback
Selected track is
highlighted.
99
The Clavinova has convenient repeat functions that let you repeatedly
play back the same song or sections within the song. This function is
useful when you want to practice a difficult phrase.
Select the desired mode from the available four Repeat modes from
the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (display page 4).
Repeat Functions
Four Repeat modes
• OFF (Repeat function is turned off)
• PHRASE (Phrase Repeat)
• 1 SONG (1 Song Repeat)
• AB mode (AB Repeat)
The ALL or RANDOM playback mode
(in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display)
will be disengaged when any of the
Repeat modes are selected.
Any previously set Repeat mode will
be reset to OFF when a different song
is selected.
102
CVP-202
Phrase Repeat ......................................................................................................
When playing back Yamaha software that includes special phrase
marks, such as DOC files, you can select specific phrase numbers (as
indicated on the accompanying sheet music) and repeatedly practice only
the selected phrase. (Phrase Repeat can be used for the four songs for
which notation is provided in the included Music Book.)
If you select PHRASE by using the REPEAT MODE or buttons,
the PHRASE display for selection of the phrase number will appear at
the right of the button. Press PHRASE or to highlight the corre-
sponding function in the display, then select the phrase number by using
the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
You can also select the phrase number by pressing PHRASE or .
Once song playback is started, the selected phrase will be played back
repeatedly until playback is stopped.
Parts can be turned on/off even during
the performance.
The Guide function can also be used
simultaneously with Phrase Repeat.
When Phrase Repeat is started, a
lead-in count automatically plays
before the phrase. However, for free-
tempo songs, a lead-in count is not
available.
1 Song Repeat ......................................................................................................
When 1 SONG is selected by pressing the REPEAT MODE or
button, any song selected and played as described above will play repeat-
edly until stopped.
Lead-in count is not played.
AB Repeat .................................................................................................................
This function allows you to specify any section (between point A and
point B) of a song, letting you repeatedly play back the selected section
for practice.
When AB mode is selected by the REPEAT MODE or buttons,
A and B will appear at the right of the buttons in the display to specify
points A and B.
The specified A and B points will be
erased when a new song number or
another Repeat mode is selected.
A lead-in count automatically plays
before the specified section AB Re-
peat playback is started. However, for
free-tempo songs, a lead-in count is
not available.
To specify the A point as the begin-
ning of the song, press A
before
playback starts. In this case a lead-in
count is not available.
Specifying only the A point results in
repeat playback between the A point
and the end of the song.
The B point cannot be selected unless
an A point is selected.
Song Playback
100
103
CVP-202
While the song is playing back, press the A button once at the
beginning of the section to be repeated.
Then, press the B button at the end of the section to be repeated.
Repeat playback of the specified section (from point A to point B)
will begin automatically.
The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song or
a different Repeat mode is selected. The same section can be played back
repeatedly as many times as you desire by using the [PLAY/STOP] but-
ton.
When both the A and B points have been specified, you can clear the
A and B points by pressing the A button, or just the B point by press-
ing the B button. You can then specify other A and B points within the
song.
Song Playback
101
Pause .............................................................................................................................
Press the [PAUSE] button during song playback to temporarily stop
song playback. Press [PAUSE] again or the [PLAY/STOP] button to
resume playback from the same point.
Rewind and Fast Forward........................................................................
Use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to rewind or fast forward to the
playback point of the song.
While playback is stopped or paused, the [REW] and [FF] buttons
can be used to step backward or forward through the song a measure
at a time. Holding down either button continuously moves through the
song in the corresponding direction.
During playback, the [REW] and [FF] buttons allow you to move the
playback point of the song rapidly as long as the button is held. No
sound is produced during [REW] operation.
Other Playback Controls
Using the [REW] button may cause the
voice, tempo, and/or volume to change.
SON G
PAU S E R E W F F
REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
104
CVP-202
Playing Other Types of Music Data
About Compatible Software..................................................................
The CVP-202 can play back the following types of software.
• Sequence formats: SMF (format 0 and 1), ESEQ
• Voice allocation formats: GM System Level 1, XG, DOC
Refer to “MIDI and Data Compatibility” (page 172) for information
on the voice allocation formats and sequence formats.
The internal tone generator of the CVP-202 automatically resets for
compatibility with either the Yamaha XG format (including GM System
Level 1) or the Yamaha DOC voice allocation (page 172), depending on
the playback data. (However, the selected voice allocation on the panel
will not change.)
Song Data Recorded on Other Instruments ........................
Song data recorded on Clavinovas other than the CVP-202 will nor-
mally be played back with the correct voices even though the volume
balance may be slightly different. However, data recorded using the Auto
Accompaniment function of the CVP-50/70 cannot be played back prop-
erly.
Song data recorded on the Yamaha Disklavier can also be played back.
Regardless of the type of software, only
the following disk formats can be used:
3.5" 2DD 720 kilobyte format and 3.5"
2HD 1.44 megabyte format.
Song Playback
102
The Lyric Display function (page 109)
cannot be used with song data recorded
in SMF format 1.
105
CVP-202
The Clavinova has a special Guide function which allows you to
practice by using the appropriate disk software. The “piano roll”
display and the keyboard guide lamp indicate which keys you
should play, and when you should play them. You can even
practice at your own pace since the Clavinova pauses playback
of the accompaniment until you play the correct keys. (You can try
out the Guide function by pressing one of the GUIDE CONTROL
buttons during playback of the “4. GUIDE Demo” song in the
Demo mode.)
Guide Control
The Clavinova has three different Guide methods that can be selected
depending on your playing experience or preferences. Beginning players
should practice first with Easy Play, then go on to Next Note, then Sound
Repeat.
Guide Methods and Piano Roll
FOLLOW LIGHTS and CueTIME
software should be used with the Next
Note method, as the Easy Play and
Sound Repeat methods may not function
properly with such software.
Practicing the Timing: Easy Play .....................................................
Since the Easy Play method lets you practice only the timing of the
notes, you can play anywhere on the keyboard. The melody will play
back smoothly when you play with the correct timing. (The accompani-
ment plays back normally in tempo.)
Practicing the Notes: Next Note .......................................................
The Next Note method lets you check which notes to play by looking
at the piano roll display and the keyboard guide lamps. Since the
Clavinova waits to play the accompaniment until you play the correct
note, you can practice at your own pace.
The keyboard guide lamps indicate the timing in which to play, by
changing from lit-up to flashing.
If the guide lamps do not flash…
The guide lamps may not flash in the
case of a few songs because of a special
guide system. In case of such songs,
however, you can switch to the Next Note
method so that the lamps flash, if you
like. See the Other Guide-related Func-
tions on page 108.
If the guide lamps and piano roll are
transposed up or down…
The guide lamps and piano roll may be
transposed up or down by one or two
octaves for certain songs. The guide
lamps and piano roll will not indicate
notes exceeding the 88-key range of the
keyboard.
103
Keyboard guide lamps
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PL AY
NEXT NOTE
SOUN D
REPEAT
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PL AY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
106
CVP-202
Practicing Phrase-by-Phrase with the Playback:
Sound Repeat
.......................................................................................................
In the Sound Repeat method, the Clavinova plays back a short phrase.
Listen to the phrase and practice.
As soon as you play the phrase correctly, the Clavinova will automati-
cally play the next phrase.
Number of Repeats
You can set the number of times the
phrase will be repeated in the SONG
PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display
page 5). (See page 109.)
The keyboard guide lamps can be turned
on or off as desired in the SONG PLAY
[GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5).
(See page 109.)
Piano Roll
To show the piano roll in the display, press any GUIDE CONTROL
button, then press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback. A bar of
the same length as the note to be played scrolls down from the top of the
display toward the bottom. You should play the note at the time the bar
reaches the bottom of the display. In order to play the note with the cor-
rect duration, hold the note for as long as the bar remains in the display.
Piano Roll ON/OFF
The piano roll display can be turned on
or off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE
MODE] display (display page 5). (See
page 109.)
Z Set up the desired song for practicing.....................................
Check that the disk is properly inserted in the disk drive before call-
ing up the Guide function.
Using the Guide Function
Before Practicing
Before starting to practice, play back the
entire song without canceling the part to
be practiced and listen to it carefully. This
will give you a clear idea of how the song
should be played, and will make your
practice sessions progress more
smoothly.
Auto Part Cancel
If you turn on the Guide function without
canceling playback of the part to be
practiced, 1/RIGHT part is guided (or the
2/LEFT part is guided when the 1/RIGHT
part contains no data). However, when
you cancel the part before turning on
Guide, the setting will be kept until the
song is changed.
Guide Control
Select the song and cancel the part that you wish to practice your-
self from the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1).
104
107
CVP-202
X Select the Guide method. ........................................................................
Press one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons: [EASY PLAY], [NEXT
NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT].
The lamp of the corresponding button lights.
Turning Off the Keyboard Guide
Lamps
The keyboard guide lamp can be turned
on and off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE
MODE] display. (See page 109.)
When the GUIDE CONTROL buttons
cannot be turned on…
The GUIDE CONTROL buttons can be
used only in the Song Play mode or
when the 4. GUIDE Demo song is
selected in the Demo mode. Only one
Guide mode can be selected at a time.
C Practice the part. ...............................................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback.
The piano roll will appear. Practice along with the accompaniment.
Piano Roll On/Off
The piano roll display can be turned on or
off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE]
display (display page 5). (See page 109.)
The correct melody plays back no matter
which note you play in the EASY PLAY
mode.
The Guide method can be changed
during playback. However, the Guide
method cannot be changed for songs in
which SPECIAL is indicated in the
GUIDE MODE location in SONG PLAY
[GUIDE MODE] (display page 5).
The [PAUSE] button cannot be used in
the Next Note or Sound Repeat methods.
V Stop your practice session. ..................................................................
The Guide function stops automatically when playback reaches the
end of the song. You can also stop song playback by pressing the [PLAY/
STOP] button.
To turn off the Guide function, press the appropriate button - [EASY
PLAY], [NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT] - so that the lamp turns
off.
The keyboard guide lamps light corre-
sponding to the notes played by the 1/
RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts during song
playback, even when Guide is set to
off - unless the LAMP button is turned
off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE]
display. The guide lamps indicate the
notes to be played by both the 1/
RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts when both
are turned on or off; when only one of
the parts is turned off, the lamps indi-
cate the notes to be played by the part
that is turned off.
The guide part can be selected, the
piano roll and guide lamps can be
turned on and off, and the Guide func-
tion itself can be turned on or off during
playback.
Guide Control
105
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PL AY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
SON G REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
108
CVP-202
Playback tempo can be set to any
desired value after a song has been
selected by using the TEMPO [] and
[+] buttons.
The Guide function may not work
properly with software which was not
produced for independent left- and
right-hand playback.
Since the Guide phrases used in the
Sound Repeat method are automati-
cally determined by the Clavinova,
they may not precisely match the
actual musical phrases. Also, the
phrases may become shorter when the
Guide function is used for both the left-
and right-hand parts.
Various settings related to the Guide functions can be made in the SONG
PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5).
Other Guide-related Functions
The settings made in this display will also
be effective in the Guide function during
playback of the 4. GUIDE Demo song in
the Demo mode.
GUIDE MODE .........................................................................................................
NORMAL is usually displayed as the setting of the GUIDE MODE
function in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display. Change the set-
ting to ENSEMBLE by pressing the GUIDE MODE button; the part
which was set to Part Cancel in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (dis-
play page 1) can then be played with the regular Part Cancel function and
the other part (not set to Part Cancel) can be played with the Easy Play
function.
The ENSEMBLE mode is effective only
for songs which have data in both the
[1/RIGHT] and [2/LEFT] parts.
The ENSEMBLE mode cannot be used
when Next Note or Sound Repeat is
selected.
The GUIDE MODE setting can only be
changed when playback is stopped at
the beginning of a song.
When Next Note is selected and SPECIAL is indicated in the GUIDE
MODE display, a special Guide method is engaged for the selected song.
To return the normal Next Note mode, press the GUIDE MODE button
so that the indication changes to NORMAL.
The SPECIAL indication appears
automatically depending on the song
being played back. The SPECIAL
indication will not appear, even when
pressing the GUIDE MODE button,
when playing back songs that do not
feature the special method.
When using the Easy Play or Sound
Repeat method, the respective method
is still active, even if the SPECIAL
indication is shown.
GUIDE MODE
Settings: NORMAL, ENSEMBLE,
(SPECIAL)
Basic setting: NORMAL or SPECIAL
(depends on song)
Guide Control
106
109
CVP-202
Setting the Sound Repeat Number.............................................
To set the number of times the phrase is repeated in the Sound Re-
peat mode, press the SOUND REPEAT button. When AUTO is se-
lected, only the notes which have not been played correctly are re-
peated; the Guide function will automatically go on to the next phrase
once the previous one has been played properly.
SOUND REPEAT
Settings: AUTO, 2 10
Basic setting: AUTO
Lyric Display ON/OFF................................................................................
To turn lyric display off, press the LYRICS button to set the func-
tion to OFF.
LYRICS
Setting: ON, OFF
Basic setting: ON
Piano Roll ON/OFF .......................................................................................
The piano roll display can be turned on or off by pressing the
PIANO ROLL button. When AUTO is selected, the piano roll will ap-
pear by turning on one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons. When this
function is set to ON, the piano roll is always shown during playback;
when it is set to OFF, the piano roll is not displayed.
Keyboard Guide Lamp ON/OFF......................................................
To turn off the keyboard guide lamps, press the LAMP button to set
the function to OFF.
Guide Control
107
The Lyric Display function cannot be
used with song data recorded in SMF
format 1.
If a song does not contain lyric data, the
LYRICS function will display a row of
dashes (- - -). The LYRICS function
cannot be selected when playing back
such songs.
PIANO ROLL
Settings: AUTO, ON, OFF
Basic setting: AUTO
The SOUND REPEAT setting can only be
changed when playback is stopped at the
beginning of a song.
When a song contains lyrics, the Lyric
Display function has priority over the Piano
Roll function. The Piano Roll will be dis-
played if you turn the Lyric Display function
off as described above.
110
CVP-202
The Clavinova features comprehensive song recording func-
tions that allow you to record your own performances to floppy
disks. Three recording methods are available: Quick Recording
(page 112), which lets you record quickly and easily; Track
Recording (page 115), with which you can record multiple
instrumental parts; and Chord Sequence (page 121), which lets
you step-record Auto Accompaniment chords.
Song Recording
Structure of a Song
A song can be made up of several instrumental parts, each assigned to
a different track, as shown in the example below.
Sample song track chart
Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the
display during operation. Refer to “Messages” (page 165) for informa-
tion on the messages.
Refer to “Handling the Floppy Disk
Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks”
(page 9) for information on using
floppy disks.
Songs recorded by the CVP-202 are
saved as SMF (format 0) files.
Songs recorded using the [XG]
category voices are XG-compatible.
See page 172 for information on the
XG/SMF (format 0) format.
108
Up to 60 songs can be recorded on a single disk, depending on the
amount of data contained in each song.
Before you can record songs on a new disk, the disk must be formatted
for use by the Clavinova (see page 111).
Track Part
1 Piano (right-hand)
2 Piano (left-hand)
3 Bass
4 Strings
::
9 Rhythm
10 Rhythm
::
16 Organ
(Up to a maximum of 16 tracks.)
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME RESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
SON G
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
111
CVP-202
Song Recording
Before you can record to the included blank disk, you will have to
format it. Commercially available blank disks must also be formatted
for use. You can use the Format function in the FUNCTION [DISK 5]
display (page 146) to re-format floppy disks that have already been
used for recording.
Z Insert a disk.........................................................................................................
Gently insert the included blank disk for recording into the disk
drive face-up and shutter end first, until it clicks into place.
A few seconds after inserting the disk into the disk drive, a “Start
disk format?” message appears in the display. To start format-
ting, press the OK button. To cancel the format operation, press
CANCEL.
Recording Setup: Disk Format
The same display appears when inserting
blank unformatted disks, or disks of differ-
ent formats.
Format Types
2DD disks are formatted to 720 KB, while
2HD disks are formatted to 1.44 MB.
X Execute the format operation. .........................................................
An “Are you sure?” message appears in the LCD display; press
YES to execute the operation, or NO button to cancel it.
A bar graph appears in the LCD display during formatting to indi-
cate progress of the operation. The display automatically returns to the
previous display when formatting is completed.
D
IS
K
IN
U
S
E
Shutter
Label side of disk
109
112
CVP-202
Z Insert a formatted disk. ...............................................................................
Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” posi-
tion, then insert the disk face up with the shutter forward until it clicks
into place.
Quick Recording
The DISK IN USE lamp stays lit until the Clavinova reads and rec-
ognizes the disk.
If the Song Play mode is not automatically called up, press the
[SONG] button.
The lamp lights and the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display appears. If
the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not shown, use the PAGE [<]
and [>] buttons to select display page 1.
The Song Play mode is not automatically
engaged if the disk is inserted when one
of the disk-related FUNCTION displays
(page 139) or the CUSTOM STYLE
display (page 74) is showing.
Using Style File Disks
When using Style File disks, first load the
desired data from the Style File disk
(page 86), then insert the recording disk.
X Select the song number to be recorded. .................................
Select the SONG function, then use the SONG button, the data dial,
or the [–] and [+] buttons to select the desired song number for record-
ing.
Select a song number between 1 and 60.
Write protect tab closed
(unlocked write enabled)
D
IS
K
I
N
U
S
E
Shutter
Label side of disk
Song Recording
110
If you select a song number between 61
and 99, you will not be able to select the
Song Record mode in step 3. The
Clavinova can play back up to 99 songs
on a single disk, but it can only record
songs in song numbers up to 60.
The selected number is the location where the song will be recorded.
If a song name appears beside the song number, the selected song al-
ready contains data. Make sure that it doesn’t contain data you want to
keep before moving on to the next step! If you record to a song that con-
tains data, the existing data will be replaced by the new data.
113
CVP-202
C Select the Song Record mode. ..............................................................
Press the [REC] button.
The [REC] lamp lights and the QUICK RECORD display (Record
mode page 1) appears.
Call up page 1 by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons if the lamp
is lit but the QUICK RECORD display is not shown.
Once you have entered the Record Mode, you can press [REC] or
[EXIT] at any time before step 6 to cancel recording without saving any data.
The song number for recording can be
changed in the QUICK RECORD display.
If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on
when you enter the Record mode, the
ACMP&RHY track will automatically be
set to REC.
VSelect the part to be recorded. ........................................................
In Quick Recording, three parts can be recorded: the right hand part
(1/RIGHT), the left hand part (2/LEFT) and the Auto Accompaniment
& rhythm part (ACMP&RHY). Press the appropriate button — 1/
RIGHT, 2/LEFT or ACMP&RHY — to set the corresponding part to
REC (recording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). The
PLAY (playback) setting can be selected only for parts which already
contain data.
The ACMP&RHY part can be set to REC automatically by pressing
the panel [ACMP ON] button. To record only the rhythm, leave
ACMP&RHY set to REC, then press the [ACMP ON] button so that
the lamp goes out.
Both 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT cannot be set to
REC at the same time.
Recording the Harmony Parts
The Clavinova will record harmony notes
when you record with the Harmony function
(page 69) turned on. If the harmony type is
set to Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country,
Octave, or 1+5, the harmony notes will be
recorded in the selected track. When any
other harmony type is selected, the harmony
notes will be recorded in tracks 6 through 8.
Recording in Dual/Split Mode
If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Dual
mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 3.
If you record the 1/RIGHT part in the Split
mode, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 5.
If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Dual
mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 4.
If you record the 2/LEFT part in the Split
mode, data is recorded to tracks 2 and 5.
When the recording part is changed,
[HARMONY] and [SPLIT] are automati-
cally turned off.
Recording the Auto Accompaniment
When recording Auto Accompaniment,
the rhythm is recorded to tracks 9
through 10, bass to track 11, and chordal
backing to tracks 12 through 16.
The Chord Sequence function (page 121)
lets you record the Auto Accompaniment
without having to play chord parts in
tempo.
When any part is set to REC, the remain-
ing capacity of the disk (in kilobytes) is
shown to the right of the tempo indicator
in the display. Empty 2DD and 2HD disks
should have about 690 KB (about 69,000
notes) and 1400 KB (about 140,000
notes), respectively.
When the ACMP&RHY part is set to REC,
the metronome will sound to provide a
timing guide before recording is started.
Song Recording
When a part is set to REC (recording enabled), the Synchronized
Start function is set to stand-by, and recording automatically starts
when you play the keyboard.
111
SON G REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
Songs Recorded on Other Instruments
The Clavinova may display the Convert
to CVP song? message (page 166) If you
attempt to record data to a song created
on another instrument. Press YES to
convert the song before recording.
When a song is converted as described
here, it may not be possible to record
data in tracks other than tracks 1 or 2.
114
CVP-202
B Select the desired voices and style, etc..................................
Select the voices and accompaniment style and set the tempo in the
normal way, and other settings needed. (If you want to try out the se-
lected voices, style, tempo, or other settings, be sure to do so before en-
tering the Song Record mode in step 3, since the recording will start as
soon as you play the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button.)
When Using Style File Disks
When using Style File disks, make sure to
load the data from the Style File disk (page
86) before inserting the disk for recording.
The Auto Accompaniment sections
INTRO, AUTO FILL, ENDING, and FADE
IN/OUT can be also recorded. Press
the INTRO button before starting to
record, the AUTO FILL buttons while
recording, the ENDING button at the end
of recording, and the FADE IN/OUT
button at the beginning or ending of the
recording. When the ENDING button or
the FADE IN/OUT button is pressed at
the ending, recording stops automatically
after the ending pattern or fade out.
Recording Along with the Metronome
1. After selecting the voice, press the
[METRONOME] button, and set the
Beat parameter in the METRONOME
display.
The metronome will start
sounding.
2. The recording starts as soon as you
play the keyboard. The metronome
sound is not recorded.
When a disk is not inserted…
A song can be recorded to internal
memory if it is short enough. A maxi-
mum of approximately 2500 notes (26
KB) can be recorded; however, the
amount may be less if other functions
are used. The internally recorded song
will be deleted when the power is
turned off or when another song is
loaded. See Recording Without a
Disk (page 133) for more information.
N Start recording. ...................................................................................................
Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To
record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment in
the usual way (page 58), and finger chords in a manner appropriate to the
current accompaniment mode (pages 60 and 61).
Adjusting the Volume While Recording
You can use the [ACMP/SONG VOL-
UME] slider and the MIXER display to
adjust the volume of the Auto Accompa-
niment part while recording. Adjust the
keyboard part volume using the KBD
VOL function in the display.
If You Turn the Harmony Function or
Split Mode On While Recording…
You can record harmony notes or left
range keyboard part while recording
the 1/RIGHT part.
When the 2/LEFT part is being re-
corded, the Clavinova will not record
the harmony notes for harmony types
that are recorded to tracks 6 through 8
(see the sidebar on page 113), or the
left range keyboard part.
The keyboard guide lamps do not light up
during recording.
Song Recording
112
115
CVP-202
M Stop recording. ................................................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.
Recording stops. When the recorded data has been written to
disk, the [REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display ap-
pears.
If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the
Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording
your keyboard performance, without the Auto Accompaniment and
rhythm. Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop re-
cording.
If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the
[FADE IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the key-
board as well.
CAUTION
The Clavinova may continue to write
data to the disk for a short time after you
stop recording. DO NOT eject the disk
while the DISK IN USE lamp of the disk
drive is lit.
When a song has been recorded, the
temporary name SONG *** (*** is the
number) will automatically be given to the
song. You can change the name as
desired. (See page 127.)
The [ACMP ON] lamp automatically goes
out when recording of these parts has
finished.
When recording is finished, the song
volume is automatically reset to the
maximum setting, regardless of the cur-
rent [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] slider
position.
< Play back the recording. ........................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.
The recorded data will be played back.
During playback you can use the [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] but-
tons to control the playback, and use the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons to
change the tempo. You can also play along on the keyboard.
Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is
reached, or you can press the [PLAY/STOP] button again to stop it at
any time.
Track Recording (Multi-track Recording)
Song Recording
113
When style changes have been recorded
in a song, playback may become slightly
sluggish at points where the style
changes, depending on the styles that
were used.
Playback of songs recorded using both
the Dual mode (page 33) and the Full
Keyboard accompaniment mode (page
57) may also sound somewhat sluggish.
Z Set up the instrument for recording. ........................................
The first three steps in the Track Recording process are exactly the
same as those for Quick Recording. (See page 112.)
X Select the TRACK RECORD page ................................................
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the TRACK RECORD
page (Record mode display page 2).
The 16 tracks appear above the TRACK < and > buttons. Tracks
which are enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding the
track number, and tracks which are record-enabled are indicated by a
highlighted number. The numbers of tracks that do not contain data are
not displayed.
116
CVP-202
C Select the desired track for recording. ......................................
Press the TRACK < and > buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+]
buttons to select the track.
Track 10 (and 9, in some cases) can
only be used to record the rhythm
sound of the accompaniment style and
cannot be used to record keyboard
part. Also, the keyboard part should be
recorded on a track other than those
used for Harmony or Auto Accompani-
ment.
When the RHYTHM tracks (9 and 10)
or the Auto Accompaniment tracks (9
through 16) are set to REC, the metro-
nome will sound to provide a timing
guide.
If the Auto Accompaniment and/or
Harmony are already on when the
Track Recording page is selected, the
corresponding tracks are automatically
record-enabled.
The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.
Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected tracks to REC (re-
cording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). When a track is
set to REC, the Synchronized Start mode is turned on. The Clavinova
will start recording when you begin to play on the keyboard.
PLAY can only be selected for tracks which contain data.When a
track is muted, the track number is displayed without a surrounding box.
Three separate tracks can be set to record simultaneously when re-
cording keyboard parts.
If you intend to record using the Dual or Split functions, two tracks
must be record-enabled.
If you intend to use both the Dual and Split functions simultaneously,
three tracks must be selected.
If the Auto Accompaniment and/or Harmony are turned on, the re-
cording track numbers are automatically fixed, as described below.
* If the Auto Accompaniment is turned on, tracks 9 through 16 are au-
tomatically set to record the Auto Accompaniment data. If the Har-
mony function is turned on and a harmony type (page 70) other than
Duet, Trio, Block, 4 Part, Country, Octave, or 1+5 is se-
lected, tracks 6 through 8 are automatically set to record the Harmony
data.
When the RHYTHM button is pressed, tracks 9 and 10 are automati-
cally selected for the rhythm data. Set tracks 9 and 10 to REC, PLAY, or
OFF using the rightmost LCD button.
Song Recording
114
117
CVP-202
V Set all performance features as required. ..........................
After setting the tracks to be recorded, set up all necessary perform-
ance features as required: voice, accompaniment style, tempo, reverb,
etc.
B Start recording. ................................................................................................
Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button. To
record the Auto Accompaniment parts, start the Auto Accompaniment
in the usual way (page 58), and finger chords in a manner appropriate
to the current accompaniment mode (pages 60 and 61).
The current measure number is shown in the display as you record. The
parameters listed below will be recorded in addition to notes you play.
(Recorded parameters differ depending on the play styles and settings.)
Parameters Recorded for Each Track
• Notes
• Voice
• Keyboard volume
• Pan
• Right (damper) pedal
• Left pedal (page 138)
• Center (sostenuto) pedal
• Reverb depth
• Chorus depth
• Effect depth
• Keyboard part volume (main, second, left)
• Fade-in/out (converted into volume data)
• Scale tuning data (page 155)
Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song
• Tempo
• Reverb type
• Overall reverb depth
• Chorus type
• Effect type*
• Accompaniment style
• Section (Intro, Main A through D, Fill-In, Ending)
* The last recorded track effect takes priority.
Other Recorded Parameters
Accompaniment style data which is recorded but not listed
above includes:
• Accompaniment part volume (volume settings included in style
data, plus mixer levels set when recording)
Song Recording
115
If you want to re-record part of the song (for
example, if youve made a mistake in the
recording), you can easily do so with the
Punch-in/out Recording function (page 118).
Backing Up Your Data
Any time you have recorded some amount
of data, you should copy the data to an-
other song number for backup purposes
(see page 142 for information on the Copy
operation). Doing this prevents accidental
loss of important data, should you inadvert-
ently delete the data while recording.
118
CVP-202
N Stop recording. ................................................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.
Recording stops. The [REC] lamp goes out when the data has
been written to the disk, and the SONG PLAY display appears.
If you press the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the
Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording
your keyboard performance without the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm.
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button in order to actually stop recording.
If you stop the style by pressing the [ENDING] button or the [FADE
IN/OUT] button, the Clavinova will stop recording the keyboard as well.
When recording is finished, the [ACMP/
SONG VOLUME] level is automatically
set to the maximum value, regardless of
the current slider position.
You can add a new track to your song by selecting a new record
track(s) and voice(s) for recording as described above. You can also play
back and monitor the previously recorded tracks while you record. By
repeating this process, you can assemble a complete song.
Adding New Tracks
If you record on a track that has already
been recorded, the previous material will
be erased and the new material will be
recorded in its place.
With the Punch-in/out Recording function, you can selectively re-
record specified sections of the song. Punch-in/out recording allows you
to start recording from any “punch-in” point within a previously re-
corded track and stop recording at any “punch-out” point, leaving intact
all recorded material up to the punch-in point and following the punch-
out point.
Punch-in/out Recording
Punch-in/out recording cannot be per-
formed on tracks which have been used
to record the Auto Accompaniment or
rhythm parts, or on tracks 6 through 8
when these tracks have been used to
record harmony parts (see sidebar on
page 113).
Z Play back the song. .........................................................................................
Play back the song in order to locate the point where you want to
punch in (i.e., start re-recording).
Song Recording
116
SONG REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
119
CVP-202
X Pause before the punch-in point..................................................
Press the [PAUSE] button to pause play back a bit before the point
at which you want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before
the punch-in point so you’ll be able to grasp the timing before you
punch in.
C Turn on the Punch-in/out function. ............................................
Press the [REC] button.
The PUNCH IN/OUT display appears.
V Select a track. ....................................................................................................
Press the TRACK < or > buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+]
buttons to select the track.
The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.
Use the rightmost LCD button to set the selected track to REC (re-
cording enabled) or OFF (recording/playback disabled). PLAY can
only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a track is muted,
the track number is displayed without a surrounding box.
Auto Setting of Punch-in/out
If no other track is selected, the last re-
corded track is automatically selected for
Punch-in/out.
Song Recording
117
If you select a track that was used to record
an Auto Accompaniment or rhythm part, or
a track (6, 7, or 8) that contains a harmony
part (see sidebar on page 113), you will not
be able to set the track to REC.
PAUSE REW FF
SON G REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
120
CVP-202
B Select the punch-in mode........................................................................
Select the desired punch-in mode with the fourth LCD button. Two
modes are available, as described below.
1ST KEY
Recording begins as soon as the first key is played, after
Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).
PEDAL
Recording begins as soon as the left pedal is pressed, after
Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).
When the PEDAL punch-in mode is
selected, the left pedal is automatically
assigned for this function only (the nor-
mal pedal function is canceled).
N Select the punch-out mode....................................................................
Select the desired punch-out mode with the center LCD button. Two
modes are available, as described below.
REPLACE
When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out
point will be erased.
PCH.OUT
When recording is stopped, all data following the punch-out
point will remain intact.
M Start playback and recording. .............................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE] button to start playback from
the current paused location.
To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the 1ST KEY mode is se-
lected, simply begin playing at the point from which you want to record.
To punch in (i.e., start recording) when the PEDAL mode is selected,
press the left pedal at the point from which you want to record.
When the PEDAL Punch-in mode is
selected, recording can be started di-
rectly by pressing the left pedal, without
first pressing the [PLAY/STOP] or
[PAUSE] button to start playback.
< Stop recording. ................................................................................................
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.
Recording stops. When the data has been written to disk, the
[REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY display reappears.
When the PEDAL mode is selected,
recording can also be stopped by press-
ing the left pedal.
Song Recording
118
121
CVP-202
The Chord Sequence function lets you enter Auto Accompani-
ment data step-by-step according to chord names. You can use
this function to record the accompaniment part without having to
play the song in time with the rhythm or at a certain tempo.
Select the RECORD EDIT display (page 3 of the Record mode
display) by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons.
119
Chord Sequence
Z Set up the instrument for recording. ........................................
Just as you did in steps 1 through 3 of Quick Recording, insert a
formatted disk, select a song number, then press the [REC] button to
enter the Record mode.
You cannot use the Music Database (page
67) or the Registration function (page 89)
while recording data with the Chord Se-
quence function.
X Turn on the Chord Sequence function. .................................
Press the CHORD SEQ. button in the RECORD EDIT display.
When Chord Sequence cannot be turned
on…
The chord sequence function cannot be
used when no disk has been inserted in the
disk drive.
SON G REC
PL AY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
122
CVP-202
Changing the Auto Accompaniment
Mode
Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned
off while the Chord Sequence function is
active. However, you can select an ac-
companiment mode (other than Full
Keyboard) in the ACCOMPANIMENT
MODE display by pressing [DIRECT
ACCESS] followed by the [ACMP ON]
button. The split point can also be
changed in this display.
The Chord Sequence data will auto-
matically replace any previous data in
the Auto Accompaniment and rhythm
tracks that was recorded in the Quick
Record or Track Record modes.
Up to 999 measures can be recorded
using the Chord Sequence function.
The chord input resolution will be
automatically selected according to the
current style. For styles with 2/4, 3/4,
4/4, and 5/4 time signatures, one chord
can be entered on every 8th note or
8th-note triplet. For other time signa-
tures, one chord can be entered for
each measure.
Entering Accompaniment Style and
Section Changes
One style change or section change
(page 123) can be made at the beginning
of each measure (The Intro pattern can
only be entered at the beginning of a
song.). However, Auto Fill data can be
entered anywhere you desire.
C Move the cursor to the entry point. ...............................................
The display shows measures as a horizontal line with 8th-note divi-
sions.
To move the triangular cursor along the measure indication to the
point at which you want to enter a chord or style change, press one of the
CURSOR < or > buttons to highlight the function, then use the data dial
or [–] and [+] buttons.
You can also move the triangular cursor by pressing the CURSOR <
and > buttons.
Adjusting the Volume of Auto Accom-
paniment
You can also enter volume changes for
the Auto Accompaniment. Used judi-
ciously, these can help you create pro-
fessional-sounding dynamic changes in
the Auto Accompaniment of your song.
To do this, first enter the Auto Accompa-
niment part volume data from the MIXER
display; the volume event symbol
( )
will appear in the box at the right side of
the display. To actually record the vol-
ume data at the current position, press
the SET button in the CHORD SE-
QUENCE display. (An initial volume
event is automatically entered at the
beginning of a song.)
Chord Sequence
120
The CHORD SEQUENCE display appears, the Auto Accompani-
ment is turned on, and the Fingered 1 accompaniment mode is
selected.
123
CVP-202
V Enter and set the chords and/or style changes...........
To enter a chord, either play the chord with appropriate fingering in
the left range of the keyboard (lower than the split point), or highlight
ROOT or TYPE in the LCD display and use the data dial or [–] and [+]
buttons.
You can also select the chord by pressing the ROOT and/or TYPE
buttons.
The names of chords entered using the
keyboard are also displayed by the ROOT
and TYPE functions.
The name of the chord is displayed next to the keyboard icon in
the box at the right side of the display.
To enter a style change (style, section and tempo) simply make
the appropriate selections in the normal way.
Once the chord and/or style has been selected, press the SET
button.
A black box appears above the line at the current position in the
measure indicator, indicating that the data has been recorded at
that position. The cursor automatically moves to the next posi-
tion.
The recorded data is also shown in the display: the time signature,
style name, and section appear at the upper left, and the chord name
and tempo in the box at the right side of the display.
Continue moving the cursor to other positions and enter chords and
style changes in this manner. You can always check the entered data
during the operation by playing back the sequence using the [PLAY/
STOP] button.
The data recorded by the Chord Sequence function is listed below.
Data Recorded by the Chord Sequence Function
• Accompaniment style
• Section (MAIN A/B/C/D, Intro, Ending, Auto-fill, Fade-in/out, Break)
• Chord name
• Tempo
• Auto accompaniment part volume (MIXER settings)
• Rhythm on/off
• ACMP/SONG volume (as an initial setting only)
A fade-out cannot be entered during a fade-
in.
Entering Rhythm-only Sections
You can also record the rhythm alone (with-
out accompaniment) to your song. To do
this, record a blank chord in the desired
measure by leaving the TYPE function set
to ---.
Entering a Break
A complete break can be created by
setting the chord type to --- and setting
the rhythm sound to OFF (see
RHYTHM ON/OFF below).
The break fill pattern triggered by the
left pedal (page 138) cannot be entered
using the Chord Sequence function.
The Clavinova will normally play a fill-in
pattern as it switches between variations
(MAIN A through MAIN D). To have the
Clavinova change the style variation at
the start of a measure without playing a
fill-in pattern, press the button for that
variation twice before pressing SET.
The measure number is shown to the left
of the measure indicator.
For information on other useful editing
features, see Other Chord Sequence
Functions, below.
The same chord cannot be entered twice
in a row. If the chord displayed by the
ROOT and TYPE functions is the same
as the last chord that was recorded, the
Clavinova will not record a chord change
when the SET button is pressed.
Chord Sequence
121
124
CVP-202
B Stop recording. ....................................................................................................
When all recording has been finished, select page 2 of the CHORD
SEQUENCE display, then press the END MARK and SET buttons and
input an “end mark” which determines the location of the ending. The
end mark will be displayed in the box at the right side of the display.
The chord sequence data now resides
in tracks 9 through 16, and can be
played back in the normal way. Add
other tracks as desired by using the
standard track selection and recording
procedure. You can also record over
the Auto Accompaniment parts and
replace them with original material if
you like by using the standard track
selection and record procedure.
The song recorded via the Chord
Sequence function can be modified
later by re-entering the Chord Se-
quence mode and making the desired
changes. However, keep in mind that
any data recorded over the Auto Ac-
companiment parts (with normal track
recording) will be replaced by the
preset accompaniment style data. (For
example, even if youve recorded your
own bass part, it will be erased and
replaced by the original bass pattern if
you correct the data in the Chord
Sequence display.)
Page 2 of the CHORD SEQUENCE display contains a number of
versatile functions that help you enter chord sequence data more effi-
ciently.
Finally, press the [REC] button; the “Save recorded data?
message will appear. Press YES to store the recorded data and automati-
cally leave the Chord Sequence function; the display returns to the
SONG PLAY display. To leave without saving the data, press NO. To
continue editing the sequence without saving the data, press CANCEL.
Other Chord Sequence Functions
ALL DELETE .................................................................
To delete all sequence data, press the ALL DELETE button. An “Are
you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the operation,
or NO to cancel.
DELETE .........................................................................
To delete the data at the current cursor location, press the DELETE
button. An Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to ex-
ecute the operation, or NO to cancel.
122
Chord Sequence
125
CVP-202
END MARK ....................................................................
To enter an “end mark” at the current cursor location, press the END
MARK button followed by the SET button. An end mark signifies the end
of the song, and should always be entered to properly end each song. (An
end mark is unnecessary when ending with an Ending pattern or Fade-
out.) The cursor cannot be moved past an end mark. You can delete an end
mark by using the DELETE button, just as with other normal data.
End Mark
Unless an end mark is entered, the song
will end one measure after the last entered
data. If an Ending pattern or Fade-out is
input, the song will end at the last measure
of the Ending or Fade-out.
RHYTHM ON/OFF..........................................................
To turn the rhythm sound on or off, press the RHYTHM ON/OFF but-
ton followed by the SET button. No rhythm sound is produced following
the location to which a “rhythm off” event is entered; the rhythm starts
sounding again from the location to which a “rhythm on” event is entered.
123
The rhythm on/off status is displayed in the
box at the right side of the display.
Chord Sequence
126
CVP-202
The Record mode has a number of other convenient editing
functions that provide even greater control over the song data.
The Record Edit functions include: Setup Memory, which lets you
save the Clavinova’s current panel settings as part of the cur-
rently selected song; Song Name, which lets you name a re-
corded song file; Track Edit, which gives you a variety of track-
related editing controls, such as Track Mix and Track Delete; and
Initial Edit, which lets you change the data at the beginning of a
song, such as voice, reverb, and effect settings.
You can select the Record Edit functions from the RECORD
EDIT display (Record mode display page 3) after selecting the
song you wish to edit.
124
Other Record Edit Functions
The Setup Memory function lets you save the current panel settings to
disk so that they will automatically be restored whenever you play back
the song being edited.
Z Set up the Clavinova to play the song. ......................................
Setup Memory
For details regarding which settings
are saved by the Setup Memory func-
tion, see the Parameter Chart on page
11 of the Data List.
The settings saved by the Setup
Memory function will be deleted if you
re-record the song data or use Initial
Edit function (page 130) to edit the
initial parameter settings.
Change the Clavinova’s functions to the settings you want it to use
when playing back the song you’re editing.
X Select the Setup Memory function.................................................
Use the PAGE [>] button to select the RECORD EDIT display (page
3 of the Song Record mode display) if necessary, then press the SETUP
MEMORY button.
The “Save panel settings to disk? message is displayed.
127
CVP-202
Z Enter the desired name. .........................................................................
Use the > button to move the underline cursor to the desired char-
acter position in the file name display. (File names can be up to 12
characters in length).
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select and highlight
the character or mark you wish to enter.
Press the CH.SET button to enter the selected character to the cur-
rent cursor position and move to the next position. Continue entering
other characters or marks in this way.
To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK
button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and the
cursor moves back to the deleted position.
To abort the Song Name operation and return to the RECORD
EDIT display, press the CANCEL button.
X Register the name. .......................................................................................
When the song file name is complete, press the OK button to regis-
ter it. The new name is registered as the current song file name. To
cancel the operation, press the CANCEL button.
This function is used to name song files recorded with the
Clavinova or to change existing names. To call up the Song Name
function, press the SONG NAME button in the RECORD EDIT dis-
play.
Song Name
The Song Name function cannot be used
when a disk has not been inserted in the
disk drive.
125
Other Record Edit Functions
Press YES to save the current panel setup, or CANCEL to return
to the RECORD EDIT display.
The Clavinova displays the Don’t remove the disk!” mes-
sage and bar graph as it saves the data to the disk, then dis-
plays a Completed!” message before it returns to the
RECORD EDIT page.
128
CVP-202
Z Specify the two tracks to be mixed. ..............................................
Press the TRK A and TRK B buttons to highlight the corresponding
functions, and use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the numbers
of the two tracks to be mixed. The voices which are used for the selected
tracks are indicated above these functions in the LCD display.
X Specify the destination track. ..............................................................
Use the TRK C function to specify the track to which you want to
record the mixed data. You can also specify the track for the mixed data
by pressing the TRK C button to highlight the corresponding function,
then using the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons.
Any previous data in the destination track will be erased.
C Execute the Track Mix operation. .....................................................
Press the MIX button to begin execution of the Track Mix operation.
An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute the
Track Mix operation or press NO to cancel.
When the operation is completed, the MIX function will be replaced
by the UNDO function, allowing you to undo the Track Mix operation
and restore the previous data.
Press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out) to exit the Track Mix
function.
You can also exit the Track Mix function by pressing the [EXIT] but-
ton.
The original data will remain in tracks
A and B after the Track Mix function is
executed. If the old data is not needed,
you should delete it. (See “Track De-
lete,” below.)
A bar graph indicating the progress of
the Track Mix operation will appear
while the data is being processed.
You can check whether the results are
what you expected by starting and
stopping playback with the [PLAY/
STOP] button. (You should try this
before you do something that would
make it impossible to select the UNDO
function.)
The Undo function cannot be used
once you’ve selected another track or
exited from this mode.
The Undo feature cannot be used for
data recorded to internal memory (see
page 133).
Other Record Edit Functions
126
Press the TRACK EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT display to call
up the TRACK EDIT display. There are three pages in the TRACK EDIT
display: TRACK EDIT [MIX], TRACK EDIT [DELETE], and TRACK
EDIT [QUANTIZE].
Track Mix (TRACK EDIT page 1)
The Track Mix function combines the data from two specified tracks
and copies the result to a third specified track.
Track Edit
Track Copy
Only tracks containing data can be se-
lected by the TRK A and TRK B func-
tions. In addition, “---” (no track) can also
be selected for TRK B. In this case, the
data in track A will simply be copied to
track C.
For the Track Mix function, the selected
track voice and volume data, etc. (i.e., all
data except note data) in track A will be
effective for the destination track after the
mix operation.
129
CVP-202
X Execute the Delete operation...........................................................
Press the DELETE button. When the “Are You Sure?” message is
displayed, press YES to execute the Delete operation or NO to cancel.
The DELETE function will be replaced by the UNDO function af-
ter the Delete operation is executed. If the result is not what you ex-
pected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the deleted track.
To exit the Track Delete function, press the [REC] button (the lamp
goes out).
You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Delete func-
tion.
Track Delete (TRACK EDIT page 2)
The Track Delete function can be used to delete the data from any
specified track.
Z Specify the track to be deleted. ................................
Press the TRACK or button to highlight the function, then use
the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track to be deleted.
Only tracks containing data can be se-
lected.
A bar graph indicating the progress of the
Track Delete operation will appear while
the data is being processed.
You can check whether the results are
what you expected by starting and stop-
ping playback with the [PLAY/STOP]
button. (You should try this before you do
something that would make it impossible
to select the UNDO function.)
The Undo function cannot be used once
you’ve selected another track or exited
from this mode.
The Undo feature cannot be used for
data recorded to internal memory (see
page 133).
Track Quantize (TRACK EDIT page 3)
You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by aligning all
notes to specified beats with the Track Quantize function. For example,
you can accurately align the recorded notes to 8th- or 16th-note resolu-
tion.
Other Record Edit Functions
127
130
CVP-202
C Execute the Quantize operation. ......................................................
Press the QUANTIZE button. When the “Are you sure?” mes-
sage is displayed, press the YES button to execute the Quantize operation
or NO button to cancel.
The QUANTIZE function will be replaced by the UNDO function
after the Quantize operation is executed. If the result is not what you
expected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the quantized
track to what it was before performing the Quantize operation.
To exit the Track Quantize function, press the [REC] button (the
lamp goes out).
You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Quantize func-
tion.
Only the note data and voice data are
quantized.
A bar graph indicating the progress of
the Quantize operation will appear
while the data is being processed.
You can check whether the results are
what you expected by starting and
stopping playback with the [PLAY/
STOP] button. (You should try this
before you do something that would
make it impossible to select the UNDO
function.)
The Undo function cannot be used
once you’ve selected another track or
quantize size, or exited from this
mode.
The Undo feature cannot be used for
data recorded to internal memory (see
page 133).
The Initial Edit function allows you to change the volume level of
each track or the initial data set for the entire song after you’ve finished
recording. The INITIAL EDIT display appears when you press the INI-
TIAL EDIT button in the RECORD EDIT display. All sixteen tracks are
displayed simultaneously in this display and the settings such as volume,
voices and reverb depth can be changed.
Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data)
Any voice changes entered in the
middle of the original song will be
erased when the voice parameter is
changed in the Initial Edit mode.
When editing some types of data, it will
not be possible to change certain
parameters (indicated as “Fixed”) or
change the voices for tracks other than
tracks 1 and 2.
128
Other Record Edit Functions
Only tracks containing data can be se-
lected.
X Specify the quantize “size.................................................................
Press the LCD button below the note symbol to select the desired
quantize “size” as shown below.
32nd notes
16th note triplets
16th notes
8th note triplets
8th notes
quarter-note triplets
quarter notes
3
3
3
Z Specify the track to be quantized................................................
Use the TRACK or button to highlight the function, then use
the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the track to be quantized.
131
CVP-202
Z Select the track to be edited. ............................................................
Select the track whose parameters you wish to change by pressing
the TRACK < or > button. If TOTAL is selected, any changes will
affect the entire song rather than an individual track.
X Select the parameters to be changed. ....................................
Select the parameters to be changed by pressing the SELECT or
button.
The following parameters can be changed in the INITIAL EDIT
display. Refer to the indicated page for details on each parameter.
Parameters which can be changed with Initial Edit:
When track 1 — 16 is selected:
• VOLUME (See page 32.)
• VOICE (See page 29.)
• PAN (See page 32.)
• REVERB DEPTH (See page 43.)
• CHORUS DEPTH (See page 45.)
• EFFECT DEPTH (See page 48.)
When TOTAL is selected:
• TEMPO (See page 25.)
• Overall REVERB DEPTH (See page 42.)
• REVERB TYPE (See page 42.)
• CHORUS TYPE (See page 44.)
• EFFECT TYPE (See page 47.)
The Program Change Number (PRG#),
Bank LSB (BKL), and Bank MSB (BKM)
parameters, which are used to select
voices via MIDI, are displayed when
VOICE is selected.
Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display
129
Other Record Edit Functions
The current parameter value for the
selected track.
The parameter to
be changed.
The selected track
is highlighted.
C Change the settings. ..................................................................................
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to change the settings. You
can instantly check the effect of the changes, since the settings can be
changed during playback.
If TOTAL is selected and the value of
the reverb depth is changed, the new
setting will also affect the keyboard
sound.
The voices of the tracks to which Auto
Accompaniment, rhythm and/or Har-
mony data have been recorded, can
also be changed.
The data may not be played back
accurately if you use the [REW] button
while editing the data.
132
CVP-202
B Exit the Initial Edit function. ..................................................................
To do this, press the [REC] button.
The [REC] lamp goes out and the Initial Edit operation is com-
pleted.
You can also exit the Initial Edit function by pressing the [EXIT]
button.
If you do this after making any edits that you have not yet written to
disk, a “Write edited data?” message will be displayed. Press YES to
write the edited data and exit from the Initial Edit mode, NO to exit with-
out writing the data, or CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit mode and
continue editing.
130
Other Record Edit Functions
V Write the changes. .......................................................................................
When all the Initial Data changes have been made as desired, press
the WRITE button. When the “Are you sure?” message is displayed,
press the YES button to actually make the specified changes, or NO to
cancel.
When this is completed, the WRITE button will change to UNDO,
allowing you to undo the Write operation and restore the data of the ed-
ited track to what it was before you made any edits.
All edited data for any number of
tracks within a single song can be
written in a one-time Write operation,
by pressing the WRITE button.
You can check whether the results of
the Initial Edit operation are what you
expected by starting and stopping
playback with the [PLAY/STOP] but-
ton. (You should try this before you do
something that would make it impossi-
ble to select the UNDO function.)
The Undo function cannot be used
once youve changed the setting again,
changed a different setting, or exited
from the Initial Edit mode.
The Undo feature cannot be used for
data recorded to internal memory (see
page 133).
133
CVP-202
131
The Clavinova has about 26 KB of internal memory that you can
use to record a limited amount of song data — approximately
2,500 notes, if no other data is recorded — without using a floppy
disk.
About the CVP MEMORY Song
Chord Sequence data (page 121) cannot
be recorded to internal memory.
The Song Name (page 127) and Setup
Memory (page 126) functions cannot be
used when editing a song recorded to the
internal memory.
You can use the Track Edit (page 128)
and Initial Edit (page 130) functions to
edit a song in the internal memory.
SONG PLAY [MAIN] display when playing back the CVP
MEMORY song.
When you enter the Song Play mode after recording a song in the
memory, the SONG function displays the letters CVP in place of a
song number. You can play this song back as you would any other
song that was recorded to disk (see page 93).
If you insert a song disk and select a song number when the inter-
nal memory contains song data, a “Delete CVP MEMORY?” mes-
sage will be displayed. Press YES to delete the song data from the
internal memory. The song data will also be erased from the internal
memory by turning the power off. If you wish to keep the recorded
data, use the Song Copy function (page 142) to copy the recorded
data to disk.
Song data recorded to internal memory will
be deleted when you load a style file. In this
case, no message is displayed.
Recording Without a Disk
If you enter the Song Record mode without inserting a disk, the
words CVP MEMORY will appear in the SONG display as shown
below, and the Quick Recording, Track Recording and Punch-in/out
Recording functions will become available.
134
CVP-202
The Function mode provides various advanced functions that,
for example, let you make various MIDI settings, or give you
greater, more convenient control over disk-related operations.
These sophisticated functions let you customize the Clavinova to
your own musical needs and preferences.
CHAPTER 8: The Utility Functions
Group Display Function Page
KEYBOARD
1
Tune 136
Transpose 136
2
Key Touch & Fixed Velocity 137
Voice Setting 137
PEDAL 3 Left Pedal & Glide Range 138
DISK
4 Registration & Setup Files 139
5 Song Copy & Disk Copy 142
6 Song Delete 144
7 Song Data Transform 145
8 Disk Format 146
MIDI
9
Send Channel (Keyboard) 147
Local Control 147
Synchronization 148
10 MIDI Filter 148
11 Receive Filter 149
12
MIDI Transpose 150
Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) 150
Song Transmission 151
Remote Keyboard 151
BACKUP
13 Backup 152
14 Recall 153
UTILITY
15 Micro Tuning 154
16 Scale Tuning 155
The following functions are available:
132
Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the
display during operation. Refer to the “Messages” section (page 165) for
information on the messages.
VOLUME
MASTER
VOLUME
ACMP
/
SONG
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
DEMO
HELP
POP &
ROCK
COUNTRY
WALTZ
BALLROOM
LATIN
MARCH &
WORLD
POP
BALLADS
SWING &
JAZZ
R&B
PIANIST
DANCE
MUSIC
DATABASE
HARMONYDISK
CUSTOM
STYLE
START
/
STOP
TAP SYNCHRO START
/
STOP
CONTRAST
BEAT
EXIT
DIRECT ACCESS
PAGE
MIXER
FUNCTION
SONG
PAUSE REW FF
REC
PLAY/
STOP
SONG CONTROL
GUIDE CONTROL
EASY PLAY
NEXT NOTE
SOUND
REPEAT
PIANO &
HARPSI.
E. PIANO
ORGAN &
ACCORDION
GUITAR
PERCUSSION
BASS
VOICE
XGSYNTH.
STRINGS
BRASS
WOODWIND
CHOIR &
PAD
DUAL
SPLIT
REVERB
EFFECT
1
234
BANK
BANK
REGISTRATION/ ONE TOUCH SETTING
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
MAIN A
MAIN B
MAIN C
MAIN D
ENDING
FADE
IN
/
OUT
AUTO FIL L
INTRO
METRONOME R ESET
TEMPO
ACMP ON
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
REGIST-
RATION
FUNCTION
135
CVP-202
Using the Utility Functions .......................................................................
As the table on the preceding page shows, the utility functions are
divided among 16 display pages. Use the following procedure to display
the page containing a desired function.
Z Press the [FUNCTION] button.
You can also exit the Function mode by
pressing the [EXIT] button.
The [FUNCTION] lamp goes out.
The lamp lights and the most recently used page of the Function
mode display appears.
133
C Perform the desired operation.
Refer to Chapter 2 “Basic Operation” for instructions regarding the
selection and use of the various types of functions.
V Press the [FUNCTION] button when finished.
X Display the desired page.
Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to display the page that contains
the function you want to set.
MIXER
FUNCTION
PAG E
136
CVP-202
Tune ....................................................................................................................................
Keyboard
FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] Display — page 1
TUNE
Range: 414.8 Hz — 466.6 Hz
(–102.1 — +101.62 cents)
Basic setting: 440 Hz
The Tune function lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch, allow-
ing you to accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments.
The frequency (in Hz) of A3 is displayed by the TUNE function. The
tuning can be adjusted up or down a maximum of approximately 26 Hz
(slightly over 100 cents) in 0.2-Hz steps.
Hz and Cents
Pitch is measured in units of Hertz
(abbreviated Hz), which represents the
number of times the sound wave vi-
brates in a second.
A cent is a unit of pitch equal to 1/100
of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone).
Tune has no effect on the Drum Kit
voices.
The XG Master Tune setting is effec-
tive when playing back songs contain-
ing XG Master Tune data.
Transpose ....................................................................................................................
TRANSPOSE functions
Range: –24 — +24 semitones
(–2 — +2 octaves)
Basic setting: 0
The Transpose functions make it possible to shift the pitch of the key-
board or song data in semitone units, allowing you to match the pitch of
the Clavinova to the range of other instruments or singers.
The Clavinova has two transpose functions: ALL and SONG. The
former transposes all notes played by the Clavinova, whereas the latter
transposes song data only. When you change the setting of the ALL func-
tion, the SONG setting is also adjusted by the same amount.
The Transpose function does not affect
the Drum Kit voices.
When playing back songs containing
XG Transpose data, the XG Transpose
data is effective only for the data play-
back sound. The value set on the
panel affects the keyboard sound.
The values set here affect playback
data transmitted via MIDI.
When a Transpose function is set to a
high value, notes played in the corre-
sponding range at the upper end of the
keyboard (e.g., C5 through C7 for a
value of +24) may not sound as ex-
pected. The same is true of notes at
the lower end of the keyboard when a
low Transpose value is set.
134
137
CVP-202
KEY TOUCH
Settings: See table at left.
Basic setting: NORMAL
FIXED VELOCITY
Range: 1 — 127
Basic setting: 76
Key Touch & Fixed Velocity ......................................................................
FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 2] Display — page 2
Velocity
The amount of force applied to a key is
frequently referred to in this manual as
velocity
. This is because the Clavinova
determines the amount of force that
was applied to a key by measuring the
speed with which the key was de-
pressed.
This function does not affect the actual
weight of the keys.
The Key Touch function determines how velocity affects the volume
of the voices played by the Clavinova’s keyboard. Select from four Key
Touch settings to tailor the keyboard response to the selected voice, type
of song, or your personal playing style. Press the KEY TOUCH button to
change the setting. The data dial and [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used.
Key Touch Settings
NORMAL
This is the standard keyboard response and is used as the basic
setting.
SOFT
This setting lets you produce a relatively loud sound even when
playing the keys softly.
FIXED
This setting produces a uniform degree of loudness, no matter how
forcefully or softly you play the keys. Use the FIXED VELOCITY
function to set the loudness of notes produced by the keyboard.
HARD
This setting requires you to play the keys quite strongly to produce
maximum loudness
Voice Setting .............................................................................................................
VOICE SETTING
Settings: AUTO, MANUAL
Basic Setting: AUTO
This function determines whether the basic reverb, chorus, effect, and
other settings for each voice are automatically selected when a voice is
selected. Press the VOICE SETTING button to change the setting. When
it is set to AUTO, the basic settings for each voice are automatically se-
lected when the voice is selected; when it is set to MANUAL, the set-
tings do not change when voices are selected.
The following settings are automatically
selected when VOICE SETTING is set to
AUTO:
Function Page
Reverb ON/OFF 41
Reverb depth settings 42
Chorus depth settings 45
Effect ON/OFF 46
EFFECT TYPE 47
Effect DEPTH 48
Effect VARIATION 47
HARMONY TYPE 70
Harmony SPEED 71
Harmony VOLUME 71
OCTAVE settings 32, 34, 38
Keyboard
135
138
CVP-202
Left Pedal & Glide Range...........................................................................
Pedal
FUNCTION [PEDAL] Display — page 3
LEFT PEDAL
Settings: See table at left.
Basic setting: SOFT
LEFT PEDAL Settings
Setting Description
SOFT
The left pedal functions as the soft pedal (basic setting). (See
page 40.)
START/STOP
The left pedal functions as the [START/STOP] button. (See page
52.)
HARMONY
When the Harmony function is set to on, Harmony is applied
only while the left pedal is held down. (See page 69.)
REGISTRATION
The panel settings registered to the next Registration number
are recalled each time the left pedal is pressed. (See page 91.)
REG.FREEZE
The left pedal switches the Registration Freeze function on and
off; that is, it performs the same function as the FREEZE button
in the REGISTRATION [FREEZE] display (page 91).
ENDING/RIT
The left pedal functions as the [ENDING] button. You can have
the song end ritardando (slow down gradually) by pressing the
left pedal twice in succession. (See page 56.)
BREAK
Pressing the left pedal during style playback produces a break
in the accompaniment and rhythm for as long as the pedal is
held. When the pedal is released, normal playback resumes
from the next measure. If you press the left pedal a second
time within one measure, normal playback resumes immedi-
ately.
BREAK FIL
Pressing the left pedal during style playback causes the
Clavinova to play a special “break fill-in” pattern. This pattern is
different from the fill-in patterns produced by the Auto Fill func-
tion. (See page 51.)
BASS HOLD
While the left pedal is pressed, the bass note played by the
Auto Accompaniment will be held even if the chord is changed.
This function does not work when FULL KEYBOARD is se-
lected as the accompaniment mode (page 61).
FADE IN/OUT
The left pedal performs the function same as the [FADE IN/
OUT] button. (See pages 55 and 56.)
EFFECT VARI
This function switches the effect variation on or off; that is, it
performs the same effect as the VARIATION button in the
EFFECT display (page 47).
GLIDE UP S
GLIDE UP M
GLIDE UP F
GLIDE DOWN S
GLIDE DOWN M
GLIDE DOWN F
Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to rise an amount
specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is
released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of
three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the se-
lected setting).
Pressing the left pedal causes the pitch to drop an amount
specified by the GLIDE RANGE function. When the pedal is
released, the pitch glides smoothly back to normal at one of
three speeds (slow, medium or fast, depending on the se-
lected setting).
If the left pedal is set to REGISTRATION,
the setting of the left pedal function in
Registration memory is not recalled.
136
GLIDE RANGE
Settings: 1 — 12 (semitones)
Basic setting: 1
This function conveniently lets you set the left pedal to control one of
various functions.
139
CVP-202
137
Registration & Setup Files ........................................................................
You can use the functions on this page to load, save, delete, and re-
name data files containing registration data (page 89) or panel setup data.
Before executing one of these functions, make sure that the disk you
want to use for this operation is inserted in the disk drive.
Disk
FUNCTION [DISK 1] Display — page 4
Z Select the file type.
Press either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the file type to
be loaded, saved, deleted or named.
REGISTRATION
A Registration file may contain the data for just one
registration, or a full set of twenty. Refer to page 11 in
the Data List for a list of settings registered by the
Registration function.
ALL SETUP
An All Setup file contains all panel setting data in the
list on page 11 in the Data List.
If you select REGISTRATION as the file type, you can also use the
REGIST function to specify whether the operation will affect one
memory location or a full set of twenty.
When saving registration data, the REGIST setting specifies which
memory location(s) will be saved to disk. When loading data, the
REGIST setting specifies how the registration data will be loaded, as
shown below:
You can delete or rename any registra-
tion file on the disk, regardless of the
REGIST setting.
REGIST setting:
File contains: ALL A1 — E4
All
registrations
All registrations are loaded.
Only registration saved from
specified location is reloaded
(to original location).
One
registration
Selected registration file is
loaded into original location.
Selected registration file is
loaded into specified location.
140
CVP-202
X Select the file operation.
File operations cannot be performed
while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the
Song mode before attempting to
perform a file function.
Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file opera-
tion: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.
C Press the START button.
The file operation begins.
The subsequent steps for each file operation depend on the operation
you’ve selected. Refer to the corresponding instructions for each opera-
tion below.
LOAD .........................................................................................................................................
When you select LOAD, the Load function display will appear. The origi-
nal internal data will be replaced when you execute the Load operation. Be
sure to save all important data to disk (see below) before using the Load op-
eration.
138
Disk
First, select the desired file to be loaded. Press either of the two leftmost
LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.
An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to load
the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Load operation.
SAVE..........................................................................................................................................
When you select SAVE, the name entry function display for the file to be
saved will appear.
Press the > button to move the underline cursor, and select the character
position of the file name. (File names can contain up to twelve characters.)
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to highlight the characters to be
input.
141
CVP-202
Disk
139
Press the CH.SET button to input the selected characters at the current
underline position of the file name. Continue moving the cursor to other
characters or marks and entering them in this way.
To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK button.
The character before the underline cursor is deleted and the cursor moves
back to the deleted position.
To abort the name entry operation and return to the FUNCTION [DISK
1] display, press the CANCEL button.
When the file name has been completely entered, press the SAVE button
to execute the Save operation.
If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, a “Same name!
Overwrite?” message will appear. Press the OK button to overwrite the origi-
nal file with the new file, or CANCEL to cancel the Save operation.
DELETE ................................................................................................................................
When you select DELETE, the Delete function display will appear.
First, select the desired file to be deleted. Press either of the two leftmost
LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.
An “Are you sure? message is displayed. Press the YES button to de-
lete the selected file, or the NO button to abort the Delete operation.
First, select the desired file to be named. Press either of the two leftmost
LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.
The name entry display will appear. Enter a new file name in the same
way as described above for the Save function.
Pressing the OK button changes the current name to the newly en-
tered name. Press the CANCEL button to abort. If you enter a name
that already exists on the disk, a “Same name! Overwrite? message will
appear. In this case, press the OK button to overwrite the original file
with the renamed file, or CANCEL to abort the Name operation.
NAME ......................................................................................................................................
When you select NAME, the Name function display will appear.
142
CVP-202
Song Copy & Disk Copy ..............................................................................
FUNCTION [DISK 2] Display — page 5
The Song Copy and Disk Copy functions
cannot be executed while the [RECORD]
lamp is lit. Exit the Song Record mode
before attempting to copy a song or disk.
The functions on this page allow you to copy song data recorded by
the Clavinova to a different song number on the same disk, or to a differ-
ent disk. You can also use the Disk Copy function to copy an entire disk.
You will not be able to select DISK1 – 1
as the copy function if the disk you
inserted is write protected (page 9).
If the Clavinova’s memory contains
song data recorded without a disk
(page 133), CVP – DISK will automati-
cally be selected as the copy function.
If you want to keep the CVP MEMORY
song data, you can use this function to
copy it to a disk. (Insert the disk,
specify a destination song number as
described in step 3, then execute the
copy function as usual.) You can then
use the Song Delete function (page
144) to delete the CVP MEMORY
song. Once the song has been de-
leted, you will be able to use the other
copy functions.
First insert the disk containing the source song, or the disk to be cop-
ied.
Press either of the leftmost two LCD buttons to select the copy
type. Three copy types are available.
Z Select a copy function.
X Select the source song.
If you selected DISK1 1 or DISK1 — 2 in step 1, press the SONG
button, then use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a song
number from 1 to 99.
DISK1 – 1
This function allows you to copy a song to a different
song number on the same disk.
DISK1 – 2
This function allows you to copy a song to a different
disk.
DISK COPY
This function copies all the data from one disk to an-
other disk. (All data on the destination disk is erased
by this process.)
The number and name of the selected song are displayed above
the third and fourth LCD buttons.
Disk
140
143
CVP-202
C Select the destination song number.
If you selected DISK1 — 1 as in step 1, press the SONG button, then
use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select a destination song
number between 1 and 60. (Song numbers above 60 cannot be se-
lected.)
If the destination song number already contains data, the name of
the song file will appear in the middle section of the display. In this
case, the original data of the destination song number will be re-
placed by the source song data when you execute the copy opera-
tion.
V Execute the copy operation.
The copy operation cannot be executed if
the same song number is selected as
both the source song and the destination
song for the DISK1 – 1 function. In this
case, a “Select a different number!”
message will appear.
Press the COPY button.
The copy operation begins. If you are copying to the same disk, an
Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press the YES button to con-
tinue or the NO button to cancel.
If you are copying the data to a different disk (or copying an entire
disk), a “Number of disk exchanges (
****
****
**)” message appears to indicate
the number of times the disk will have to be changed. Press the OK
button to continue, or the CANCEL button to abort the operation.
When copying data between disks, follow the instructions in the dis-
play, inserting the source and destination disks as required.
If you are using the DISK1 – 2 function to copy a song to another
disk, the “Select destination song number” message will appear the
first time you insert the destination disk. Use the data dial or [–] and
[+] buttons to select a destination song number between 1 and 60.
(Song numbers above 60 cannot be selected.)
If the destination song number already contains data, the song
name will appear in the display. In this case, the original data of
the destination song number will be replaced by the source song
data. Press the OK button to continue, or CANCEL to abort.
Copying Commercial Software
Copying of commercially available
software is strictly prohibited, except
for your personal use.
Some commercially available software
is purposely copy-protected, and can-
not be copied using these functions.
Data files (other than those made with
the CVP-202) that have been copied
once cannot be copied a second time to
another disk. Also, additional data can be
recorded only to the right-hand/left-hand
parts of the copied DOC files.
Disk
141
144
CVP-202
Song Delete ...............................................................................................................
FUNCTION [DISK 3] Display — page 6
The Song Delete function cannot be
executed while the [RECORD] lamp is lit.
Exit the Song Record mode before at-
tempting to delete a song.
You can delete unneeded song data from the disk in this display. Be
careful not to delete any important data on the disk; once the delete op-
eration is performed, it cannot be undone.
Z Insert the disk.
Insert the disk containing the song data to be deleted into the disk
drive.
X Select the song to be deleted.
Use the SONG and buttons, the data dial, or the [–] and [+] but-
tons to select the song to be deleted. The song data in the Clavinova’s
memory can be also deleted with this operation. To do this, select
CVP MEMORY instead of a song number (CVP MEMORY appears
only when the memory contains song data).
C Execute the delete operation.
Press the DELETE button.
An “Are you sure? message will be displayed. Press the YES button
to delete the selected song, or press the NO button to cancel the
operation.
Disk
142
145
CVP-202
Song Data Transform .......................................................................................
FUNCTION [DISK 4] Display — page 7
The Song Data Transform function can-
not be used while the [SONG] lamp is lit.
Exit the Song mode before attempting to
transform song data.
This function allows you to convert song data recorded on the CVP-
202 for playback on other Clavinova models or a Disklavier.
Z Insert the disk.
2DD Disks Only!
Only data saved on 2DD disks can be
converted. To transform song data that
has been saved on a 2HD disk or re-
corded in the Clavinova’s memory, use
the Song Copy function (page 142) to
copy the song to a 2DD disk before you
attempt to convert it.
Insert a 2DD disk containing the data to be converted in the disk
drive.
X Select a data format.
Data Format Compatibility
CVP-series Clavinovas other than the
models listed in the table at left can play
back song data recorded on the CVP-202
without conversion.
If you are planning to use your song data
on other instruments and want to ensure
that they will closely reproduce the sound
you achieved on the CVP-202, however,
we recommend using XG voices (see
page 30) for all tracks other than those
that play piano voices.
Use either of the two leftmost LCD buttons to select the target format
of the file (the type of instrument that will use the converted data).
The following three types are available:
CVP PERFORMANCE
This function converts data for playback on the
CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/87A/89, the DOM-
30, and the DOU-10.
PIANO FORMAT 1
This function converts data for playback on all
Disklavier models except the MX100A and the
MX100B.
PIANO FORMAT 2
This type converts the data for playback on the
Disklavier MX100A or MX100B.
C Select the song to be converted.
Use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the song number of
the song to be converted.
The number and name of the selected song are displayed above
the SONG function.
V Press the TRANSFORM button.
The converted data is saved to a song
number between 1 and 60. (Song
numbers above 60 are not used.)
The original data remains intact at the
original song number even after the
conversion has been executed.
Recording or editing cannot be per-
formed on the converted songs.
An “Are you sure? message is displayed. Press the YES button
to convert the selected song, or NO to cancel the operation. When
the conversion process is finished, a “Completed! SONG No.**
message indicates the song number to which the data was saved.
If CVP PERFORMANCE was selected in Step 2, the characters “C)
are appended to the beginning of the original name. If one of the other
formats was selected, the characters “P)” are appended.
Disk
143
146
CVP-202
Disk Format ..............................................................................................................
Floppy disks must be correctly formatted before the Clavinova can
use them for data storage. If you insert a new, unformatted disk (or a disk
that has already been initialized in a different format) in the disk drive,
the Clavinova will automatically ask you whether it should format the
disk. (See page 111 for details.)
The Clavinova also has a Disk Format function that can be used to
reformat disks that have already been formatted for use by the Clavinova.
The reformatting operation deletes any data that may have been saved on
the disk.
Z Insert the disk to be formatted.
Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” posi-
tion, and insert the disk into the disk drive face up with the shutter for-
ward until it clicks into place.
FUNCTION [DISK 5] Display — page 8
CAUTION
Formatting a disk erases all the data
on the disk. Before you format a disk,
make sure it doesn’t contain any data
that you want to keep.
X Execute the format operation.
Press the START button.
An “Are you sure?” message is displayed. Press YES to execute
the format, or NO to cancel.
A bar graph indicates the progress of the formatting process. Once the
disk has been formatted, the Clavinova can use it to store songs and
other data.
Disk
144
Format Types
2DD disks are formatted to hold 720 KB
of data; 2HD disks are formatted to hold
1.44 MB of data.
The Disk Format function cannot be used
while the [SONG] lamp is lit. Exit the
Song mode before attempting to format a
disk.
147
CVP-202
Send Channel (Keyboard).........................................................................
MIDI
FUNCTION [MIDI 1] Display — page 9
SEND CH
Settings: OFF, 1 — 16
Basic setting: See table at left.
In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels (1 through 16) of the
transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data
transfer. The SEND CH function lets you set the MIDI transmit channels
for the keyboard parts.
Part Explanation Basic Setting
LEFT Left voice in Split mode (see page 36) 3
RIGHT1 Main voice 1
RIGHT2 Second voice in Dual mode (see page 33) 2
You can set each keyboard part to transmit on a separate channel. If
you set a part to OFF, the MIDI data for that part will not be transmitted.
MIDI Reception
The Clavinova always receives MIDI data in the “Multi Timbre” mode. This is a mode in which the
Clavinova voices can be independently controlled on different MIDI channel numbers (1 through 16) by an
external MIDI device. This means that you can produce the sound of a full band or ensemble on the
Clavinova by using a computer or MIDI sequencer.
Local Control ..........................................................................................................
LOCAL
Settings: ON, OFF
Basic setting: ON
The term “local control” refers to the control of the internal tone gen-
erator by the keyboard. You will normally play the Clavinova with the
Local Control function set to ON.
Turning off the local control separates the keyboard from the tone
generator, so that the Clavinova will not output any sound when you play
the keyboard. Since keyboard performance data is still output via the
MIDI jacks, however, you can use this setting when you want to play an
external MIDI tone generator from the Clavinovas keyboard without
sounding the internal voices.
To turn the local control on or off, press the LOCAL button. The data
dial and [–] and [+] buttons cannot be used.
145
148
CVP-202
Synchronization....................................................................................................
MIDI
SYNC.
Settings: INT. (internal clock),
EXT. (external clock)
Basic setting: INT.
The playback tempo of a song or style is normally controlled by the
Clavinova’s internal clock. When you want the Clavinova’s playback
tempo to be controlled by an external sequencer or rhythm machine, you
should set the synchronization function to use an external clock. You
might use this function, for example, to play the Auto Accompaniment of
the Clavinova in perfect synchronization with an external sequencer.
To switch the synchronization from an internal clock to an external
clock (or vice versa), press the SYNC. button. The data dial and the [–]
and [+] buttons cannot be used.
MIDI Filter.................................................................................................................
The FUNCTION [MIDI 2] display contains MIDI filter settings that
can be used to enable or prevent the transmission and reception of certain
types of MIDI data.
FUNCTION [MIDI 2] Display — page 10
Program Change Messages
PROGRAM
Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),
OFF
Basic setting: Tx&Rx
Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change num-
bers received from an external keyboard or another MIDI device. For
example, the Clavinova can change voices in response to MIDI program
change messages received from a connected MIDI sequencer. (These
messages do not affect the keyboard-played voices.) The voices of con-
nected external MIDI devices can also be changed by program change
messages transmitted from the Clavinova. (Program change messages are
transmitted when changing voices on the panel of the Clavinova.)
Depending on your particular MIDI setup, you may find that this fea-
ture is convenient in some cases and not in others. Set the PROGRAM
function to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of program
change messages.
Bank MSB and LSB messages can be
transmitted and received even when
PROGRAM is set to OFF.
146
149
CVP-202
Control Change Messages
CONTROL
Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),
OFF
Basic setting: Tx&Rx
Control change messages are used for various non-keyboard perform-
ance controls, such as the damper pedal, or for expressive control of the
sound of a connected MIDI device, such as effects and volume. For ex-
ample, the Clavinova can respond to control change messages transmit-
ted from an external MIDI sequencer. (These messages do not affect the
keyboard-played voices.) Similarly, an external MIDI device can be con-
trolled by sending control change messages from the Clavinova to that
device. (Control change messages are transmitted when operating the
damper pedal, etc., on the Clavinova.)
Set CONTROL to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of
control change messages.
The control change data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in de-
tail on page 14 in the Data List.
System Exclusive Messages
SYS EX.
Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),
OFF
Basic setting: Tx&Rx
System exclusive messages are used for more advanced or detailed
MIDI control, or for controls related to specific manufacturer’s devices.
Set SYS EX. to OFF to disable the transmission and reception of sys-
tem exclusive messages.
The system exclusive data recognized by the Clavinova is listed in
detail on page 16 in the Data List.
Start/Stop Commands
START/STOP
Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/received),
OFF
Basic setting: OFF
A device that transmits the Start/Stop command can start and stop the
rhythm or sequence data performance of a receiving device via MIDI.
For example, you can transmit the Start/Stop command from an external
MIDI sequencer to start and stop the Auto Accompaniment or song play-
back on the Clavinova. Also, an external MIDI sequencer or rhythm ma-
chine can be started and stopped by starting and stopping the Auto Ac-
companiment on the Clavinova.
Set START/STOP to ON to enable the transmission and reception of
Start/Stop commands.
FUNCTION [MIDI 3] Display — page 11
Receive Filter ...........................................................................................................
RECEIVE FILTER
Settings: ON, OFF (x 16)
Basic setting: ON (x 16)
The Receive Filter function lets you prevent the Clavinova from re-
ceiving channel-specific MIDI messages — such as note data and control
changes — on certain MIDI channels.
This function is useful, for example, when you want to control some of
the Clavinova’s voices exclusively from an external sequencer, and others
using only the Clavinova’s keyboard or its built-in Auto Accompaniment
and Song mode functions. (You can also have the Clavinova ignore chan-
nels carrying messages that are intended for another instrument connected
to the Clavinova’s MIDI [THRU] terminal.)
By default, the Clavinova will receive messages on all 16 channels. Use
the following procedure to enable or disable the reception of a channel:
MIDI
147
150
CVP-202
Send Channel (Accompaniment/Harmony) ............................
SEND CH (ACMP&RHY)
Settings: OFF (not transmitted),
9–16ch (transmitted)
Basic setting: OFF
SEND CH (HARMONY)
Settings: OFF (not transmitted),
6–8ch (transmitted)
Basic setting: OFF
When the ACMP&RHY function is set to 9—16ch, the performance
data for the rhythm and accompaniment parts is transmitted via the MIDI
[OUT] terminal over MIDI channels 9 through 16.
If the HARMONY function is set to 6–8ch, the notes added by the
harmony types listed below are transmitted via the MIDI [OUT] terminal
over MIDI channels 6 through 8.
Z Select the channel.
Use the CHANNEL < and > LCD buttons to select the number of
the channel you want to enable or disable.
An underline cursor is displayed below the selected channel
number.
X Press the rightmost LCD button.
When the selected channel is enabled, ON is highlighted and the
channel number is enclosed in a solid box. When it is disabled,
OFF is highlighted, and the channel number is displayed without a
surrounding box.
MIDI TRANSPOSE
Settings: ON (enabled),
OFF (disabled)
Basic setting: ON
The MIDI Transpose function determines whether the Transpose set-
ting in the FUNCTION [KEYBOARD 1] display (page 136) will affect
the MIDI data received by the Clavinova.
The Clavinova will normally transpose the data it receives. Press the
MIDI TRANSPOSE button to switch this function on or off.
MIDI Transpose ......................................................................................................
FUNCTION [MIDI 4] Display — page 12
MIDI
148
151
CVP-202
When transmitting rhythm, accompani-
ment, or harmony part data via MIDI,
do not select the MIDI channels used
by these parts as the send channels
(page 147) used to transmit the data
for your keyboard performance. Doing
so may result in your keyboard per-
formance data being mixed with the
Auto Accompaniment or Harmony
data.
If ACMP&RHY or HARMONY is turned
on, the data for the corresponding
part(s) will be transmitted via MIDI,
even if the RIGHT1 send channel
(page 147) has been turned off.
Song Transmission ............................................................................................
SONG
Settings: OFF (not transmitted),
ON (transmitted)
Basic setting: OFF
When the SONG function is set to ON, the Clavinova will transmit
song data via the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Select this setting when you
want an external tone generator to sound in response to song data played
back by the Clavinova.
The transmission of song data is turned off by default.
Remote Keyboard ...............................................................................................
REMOTE KBD
Settings: OFF (not received),
1 — 16 (receive channel)
Basic setting: OFF
MIDI data received over the channel set with the REMOTE KBD
function will affect your keyboard performance. The received data also
can be recorded. Select OFF to prevent external MIDI data from affect-
ing your keyboard performance. The following data types can be re-
ceived:
• Key ON/OFF
• Control Change (performance data; only those listed below)
#1 Modulation
#7 Volume
#11 Expression
#64 Sustain Pedal
#66 Sostenuto Pedal
#67 Soft Pedal
#123 All notes off
MIDI data received by the remote key-
board function cannot be output via the
MIDI [OUT] terminal.
#0 BANK Select MSB*
#32 BANK Select LSB*
#6 Data Entry MSB
(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)
#96 Data Increment
(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)
#97 Data Decrement
(for RPN Pitch Bend Range)
#100 RPN LSB
(Pitch Bend Range only)
#101 RPN MSB
(Pitch Bend Range only)
• Program Change (voice change data)*
• Pitch Bend
Note: Items marked with an asterisk are used to change the main voice.
MIDI
149
Harmony types transmitted on channels 6 through 8:
• Echo • Tremolo • Trill • Strumming
• Add Jazz Gtr • Add Brass • Add Strings • In The Forest
* See page 69 for details on the Harmony function.
Notes added by other harmony types are always transmitted on the
RIGHT1 channel (page 147), regardless of this setting.
The rhythm, accompaniment, and harmony parts can be recorded by a
computer or external sequencer when these functions are turned on.
152
CVP-202
Backup ............................................................................................................................
Backup
FUNCTION [BACKUP 1] Display — page 13
Backup functions
Settings: ON, OFF
Basic settings: ON (REGISTRATION)
OFF (all other groups)
This function allows you to set the backup of various parameter
groups on or off. When set to on, the corresponding settings will not be
reset to the basic settings (default settings) when power is turned off.
Press the or button or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to
select the desired group, then use the rightmost LCD button to set the
selected group to backup on/off. The (“*”) mark at the beginning of the
group name indicates that the backup setting of the group is turned on.
The settings of groups whose backup settings are set to off will return to
the basic settings (default settings) when the power is turned off.
Backup is used for the following groups on the Clavinova.
Group Description
VOICE SETTING Voice-related settings
REVERB/EFFECT Reverb, chorus, and effect settings
TUNE Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning
PEDAL Pedal function settings
ACMP SETTING Auto Accompaniment-related settings
SONG SETTING Settings related to the Song mode
REGISTRATION Registration data, Freeze function settings
MIDI SETTING MIDI function settings
Permanent Settings
The following settings are always backed
up:
Help language
Song volume
Backup ON/OFF
Refer to page 11 in the Data List for a list of the specific parameters
in each group.
Parameters that are backed up will be retained in memory for about a
week if the Clavinova is not turned on during this time. All parameters
will be reset to their default values if the power remains off for longer
than about a week. To ensure that your backed-up settings are main-
tained, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week.
150
153
CVP-202
Recall ................................................................................................................................
This function can be used to recall the initial factory settings (basic
settings) for a group of parameters, or for all parameters at once.
Press the or buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] buttons to
select the group you want to recall, then press the START button.
FUNCTION [BACKUP 2] Display — page 14
An “Are you sure? message will be displayed. Press the YES
button to recall, or NO to cancel.
The following parameter groups of the Clavinova can be recalled.
Group Description
VOICE SETTING Voice-related settings
REVERB/EFFECT Reverb, chorus, and effect settings
TUNE Master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning
PEDAL Pedal function settings
ACMP SETTING Auto Accompaniment-related settings
SONG SETTING Settings related to the Song mode
REGISTRATION Registration data, Freeze function settings
MIDI SETTING MIDI function settings
ALL All of the above settings
Permanent Settings
The factory settings of the following
parameters are not recalled:
Help language
Song volume
Backup ON/OFF
However, these and all other settings can
be reset to the initial factory values by
turning the power on while holding down
the rightmost key on the keyboard (C7).
When this is done, the “Back up data
erased and replaced by factory data”
message appears to indicate that all
backed up data has been erased and the
factory settings have been recalled. After
this message is displayed for a few sec-
onds, the main display will appear.
Refer to page 11 in the Data List for a list of the specific parameters
in each group.
Backup
151
154
CVP-202
The Micro Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each
key of the keyboard. The created tuning can be saved to a disk and
loaded whenever necessary. The currently loaded custom tuning can be
turned on or off at any time by using the leftmost LCD button in this
display.
Utility
FUNCTION [MICRO TUNING] Display — page 15
Micro Tuning Setup............................................................................................
Z Select a key.
Press the key to be tuned.
The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key will
appear in the display.
X Set the tuning.
TUNE
Range: –100 cent — +100 cent
–1 — +1 semitone
Basic Value: 0 cent (all keys)
Press the TUNE or buttons or use the data dial or [–] and [+] to
tune the pitch of the selected key. If you set the parameter at the
leftmost LCD button to ON, you can play the key being tuned in or-
der to check the sound during this operation. The normal tuning of ±0
cents for the selected key can be instantly recalled by simultaneously
pressing both the TUNE and buttons.
C Repeat steps 1 and 2.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the required keys have been tuned.
Micro Tuning Files...............................................................................................
The custom tuning can be named and saved to disk as a tuning file.
Tuning files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they are
no longer needed.
Z Insert a disk in the disk drive.
Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk
drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or
rename a tuning file, the inserted disk should contain the file in ques-
tion.
152
155
CVP-202
X Select the desired file operation.
Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file
operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.
C Press the START button.
After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the
selected file operation appears.
The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 140
through 141. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file
operation.
This feature allows you to select from various tuning (temperament)
configurations, when selecting PRESET in this display. By selecting
USER, you can create your own user scale, in which the tuning you set
for a single octave takes effect for the entire keyboard. The created tun-
ing can be saved to disk for future recall.
Preset Scale ..............................................................................................................
This function lets you select from various pre-programmed tunings or
temperaments.
Until equal temperament — the most commonly used tuning at
present — was accepted, various tunings have been created over the
years for use with the particular music and instruments of the era. This
feature lets you play in historically authentic tunings, and get a better
feeling for the music of the corresponding eras.
The Clavinova contains the following seven temperaments:
LOAD See page 140.
SAVE See page 140.
DELETE See page 141.
NAME See page 141.
FUNCTION [SCALE TUNING] Display — page 16
• EQUAL
• PURE(MAJOR)
• PURE(MINOR)
• MEANTONE
• PYTHAGOREAN
• WERCKMEISTER
• KIRNBERGER
Utility
153
The Scale Tuning function does not
affect the pitch of song data played back
by the Clavinova.
156
CVP-202
C Set the tuning.
TUNE
Range: -64 cent — +63 cent
Basic Value: 0 (all keys)
Z Select PRESET with the leftmost LCD button.
The following display appears:
X Select a scale.
Press the SCALE or to highlight the parameter, then use the data
dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the temperament type.
When selecting temperaments other than equal (EQUAL) tempera-
ment, the central key (reference pitch for the temperament) must be set.
This allows you to produce the proper temperament in the desired key.
C Select the central key.
KEY
Settings: C, C
#
, D, E
b
, E, F, F
#
, G, A
b
,
A, B
b
, B
Basic setting: C
Press the KEY button to highlight the parameter, then use the data
dial or [–] and [+] buttons to select the central key.
User Scale Setup .................................................................................................
This function allows you to individually tune each key within an oc-
tave. The setting made for one key is automatically assigned to the same
key in all other octaves.
Z Select USER with the leftmost LCD button.
The following display appears:
X Press the key to be tuned.
The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key
appears.
Utility
154
Set the pitch by pressing the TUNE or buttons, or by using the
data dial or [–] and [+] buttons. You can play the key being tuned to
check the sound during this operation. The default tuning of ±0 cents
can be instantly recalled for the selected key by simultaneously press-
ing the TUNE and buttons.
V Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the required keys have been tuned.
157
CVP-202
LOAD See page 140.
SAVE See page 140.
DELETE See page 141.
NAME See page 141.
User Scale Files ...................................................................................................
The custom scale can be named and saved to disk as a user scale file.
User scale files can be loaded whenever necessary, or deleted when they
are no longer needed.
Z Insert a disk in the disk drive.
Make sure that a properly formatted disk has been inserted in the disk
drive before executing a file operation. If you want to load, delete, or
rename a user scale file, the inserted disk should contain the file in
question.
X Select the desired file operation.
Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file
operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.
C Press the START button.
After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the
selected file operation appears.
The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 140
through 141. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file
operation.
Utility
155
158
CVP-202
The Clavinova is equipped with jacks that let you connect a variety of audio devices. You
can connect headphones, a stereo system, or PA equipment for audio output, as well as
input from a tone generator or other instrument.
Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting audio equipment, as fail-
ing to do so can result in damage to speakers and other problems.
CHAPTER 9: Connections
Audio Connections
Recommended Headphones:
Yamaha HPE-160 headphones
Headphones
To use headphones, connect them to
one of the [PHONES] jacks (standard 1/
4" phone jacks) located below the left
end of the keyboard. The Clavinova’s
built-in speaker system is automatically
shut off when a pair of headphones are
connected. Two people can enjoy listen-
ing to the Clavinova together by con-
necting two pairs of headphones to the
two jacks.
PHONES
You can connect the Clavinova to a wide range of audio equipment by
using the AUX IN and AUX OUT jacks, which are located at the left end
of the unit on the rear panel.
AUX IN Jacks...........................................................................................................
Audio Input and Output
CAUTION
Never connect the Clavinova’s AUX
OUT jacks to its AUX IN jacks, either
directly or via external audio equip-
ment. Such connections could result
in a feedback loop that will make nor-
mal performance impossible, and may
even damage the Clavinova.
The volume of the audio signal input at
the AUX IN jacks is affected by the
[MASTER VOLUME] slider.
The sounds of other instruments or
tone generator modules can be output
through the speaker system of the
Clavinova by connecting audio cables to
the AUX IN jacks as shown here.
Use the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack for
monophonic input. For stereo input, con-
nect the left channel output to the AUX
IN [L/L+R] jack, and the right channel
output to the AUX IN [R] jack.
Tone Generator
AUX IN
R
L/L
+
R
156
CAUTION
159
CVP-202
AUX OUT Jacks ....................................................................................................
By connecting audio cables to the
AUX OUT jacks as shown here, you can
output the sound of the Clavinova to a
stereo system, amplifier, mixing console,
or recording equipment. Since the AUX
OUT jacks provide output at a fixed
level, you will need to use the controls
on the connected equipment to adjust the
overall volume of the sound from the
Clavinova.
Use the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack for
monophonic output. For stereo output,
connect the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack to
the left channel input, and the AUX OUT
[R] jack to the right channel input.
AUX OUT
R
L/L
+
R
Stereo System
Audio Connections
157
160
CVP-202
Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI terminals on the Clavinova to
other MIDI devices. The Clavinova’s MIDI terminals are located at the
left of the unit on the rear panel.
Tone generators or other devices to be controlled by the Clavinova can
be connected to the MIDI [OUT] terminal. Devices that will control the
Clavinova should be connected to the MIDI [IN] terminal. If you have a
personal computer or sequencer that will control the Clavinova, you may
want to connect it to both the [IN] and [OUT] terminals to allow two-way
communication. In this case, any other instruments to be controlled by the
same device can be connected to the Clavinova’s MIDI [THRU] terminal.
You can use the MIDI terminals to connect your Clavinova to a wide range of MIDI devices,
including personal computers, sequencers, tone generators, and so on. You can also use
computer music data with the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the [TO HOST] or [MIDI] jack.
Be sure to turn off the power when connecting or disconnecting computers or MIDI equipment, as failing to
do so can result in damage to equipment.
Connecting MIDI Equipment
MIDI Sequencer Tone Generator
THRU
OUT
IN
MIDI
[TO HOST] or MIDI?
If you simply want to connect your
Clavinova to a personal computer, it
may be more convenient to use the
[TO HOST] terminal, as your computer
won’t need a special MIDI interface to
make that connection.
When you use the computer’s USB
port to connect your Clavinova, a USB
interface is needed.
The MIDI terminals are particularly
convenient when you want the
Clavinova to function as part of a more
extensive MIDI setup.
Connecting to a Host Computer
Data Connections
158
CAUTION
HOST SELECT
MIDI
Mac
PC
-
1
PC
-
2
“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your
Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific
models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address:
Clavinova Web site (English only) :
http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/
Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) :
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
When you use the MIDI termi-
nals, set the [HOST SELECT]
switch to the MIDI position. The
MIDI terminals will not transmit or
receive data if this switch is set to
any other position.
You can set the Clavinova’s
MIDI parameters using pages 9
through 12 of the FUNCTION dis-
play (see page 147 through 150).
When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova
and the computer before you connect any cables or set the [HOST SELECT] switch. After making the
connections and switch settings, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova.
If you do not use the [TO HOST] jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the
jack. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.
When the [HOST SELECT] switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the [TO HOST] jack,
but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the
other hand, when the [HOST SELECT] switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but
not the [TO HOST] jack since no data is transferred via the [TO HOST] jack.
161
CVP-202
Data Connections
159
Connecting the serial port on the computer to the
Clavinova’s [TO HOST] jack
..................................................................................
Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s
[TO HOST] jack.
In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore,
you do not need a special MIDI interface.
Connection
Use a special serial cable to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or
RS-422) to the Clavinova’s [TO HOST] jack.
Note for Windows users (regarding the
MIDI driver)
To transfer data via the computer’s serial port
and the Clavinova’s [TO HOST] jack, you need
to install a specific MIDI driver (the Yamaha
CBX driver for Windows). You can download
this driver from XG Library on the Yamaha Web
site.
http://www.yamaha-xg.com
Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments
According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following
serial cables.
TO HOST
Windows Macintosh
modem portRS-232C (D-sub 9-pin)
Clavinova
HOST SELECT
MIDI
Mac
PC
-
1
PC
-
2
TO HOST
8 (CTS)1
7 (RST)2
2 (RxD)3
4 5 (GND)
8
3 (TxD) 5
mini DIN
8-pin
D-sub
9-pin
Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin)
8-pin mini DIN plug D-sub 9-pin plug
(Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent)
2 (HSK i)1
1 (HSK 0)2
5 (RxD-)3
mini DIN
8-pin
4 GND4
3 (TxD-)5
8 (RxD+)6
7 (GP i)7
6 (TxD+)8
mini DIN
8-pin
Macintosh
System peripheral plug 8-pin plug
(Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent)
Pin assignment
The following diagram shows the pin
assignments for each cable.
1
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
34
678
5
2
mini Din 8-pin D-sub 9-pin
Pin numbers (view from front)
162
CVP-202
Connecting the computer’s USB port to the Clavinova via
a USB interface, such as the UX256, UX96, or UX16
..................
Connect the computer’s USB port to the USB interface (such as the UX256,
UX96, or UX16) using a USB cable. Install the driver (that came with the USB
interface) on the computer, and connect the USB interface to the Clavinova using
a serial cable or MIDI cables.
For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the USB interface.
160
Clavinova [HOST SELECT] switch setting
Set the Clavinova [HOST SELECT] switch properly according to the type of
connected computer.
• Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock)
Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps)
If your system does not work
properly with the connections
and settings listed above, your
software may require different
settings. Check your software
operation manual and set the
[HOST SELECT] switch to the
proper data transfer rate.
An example of connecting the USB interface to the Clavinova
using a serial cable
An example of connecting the USB interface to the Clavinova
using MIDI cables
USB interface
Clavinova
or
Standard Machintosh 8-pin system
peripheral cable
USB cable
USB
USB
HOST SELECT
PC
-
1
TO HOST
Mac
computer
computer
USB interface
Clavinova
MIDI cablesUSB cable
USB
USB
HOST SELECT
MIDI
OUTIN
MIDI
Data Connections
163
CVP-202
APPENDICES
Effect Type Lists
161
The tables in this appendix contain descriptions of the various
reverb, chorus, and effect types that are available for use on the
CVP-202.
Reverb Type List
Type Description
HALL1
HALL2
HALL3 Concert hall reverb effects
HALL4
HALL5
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
ROOM4 Small room reverb effects
ROOM5
ROOM6
ROOM7
STAGE1
STAGE2
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument
STAGE3
STAGE4
PLATE1
PLATE2 Simulated steel plate reverb effects
PLATE3
WHITE ROOM Unique short reverb with a slight initial delay.
TUNNEL Simulation of a cylindrical space extending to left and right.
CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit.
BASEMENT Reverb with distinctive resonance following a slight initial delay.
Chorus Type List
Type Description
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
CHORUS4
CHORUS5
CHORUS6
CHORUS7
CHORUS8
CELESTE1
CELESTE2
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3
FLANGER4
FLANGER5
Standard chorus effects that add natural spaciousness to the
sound
Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet airplane taking off and
landing
An effect which uses a 3-phase LFO to add modulation and
spaciousness to the sound.
CVP-202
164
ROTARY SP1
ROTARY SP2
ROTARY SP3
ROTARY SP4
ROTARY SP5
ROTARY SP6
ROTARY SP7
ROTARY SP8
ROTARY SP9
ROTARY SP10
TREMOLO1
TREMOLO2
TREMOLO3
TREMOLO4
GT TREMOLO1
EP TREMOLO
EP TREMOLO2
AUTO PAN1
AUTO PAN2
AUTO PAN3
EP AUTOPAN
EP AUTOPAN2
AUTO WAH1
AUTO WAH2
AUTO WAH3
AUTO WAH4
DELAY LCR1
DELAY LCR2
DELAY LR
ECHO
CROSS DELAY
DIST HARD
DIST HARD2
DIST HARD3
DIST SOFT
DIST SOFT2
DIST HEAVY
OVERDRIVE
AMP SIM
ST AMP2 Simulates a guitar amp.
ST AMP3
EQ DISCO Disco-oriented equalizer effect
EQ TEL
2BAND EQ
3BAND EQ
Mono EQ with low, mid and high equalization
Effect Type List
Type Description
HALL1
HALL2
HALL3
HALL4
HALL5
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
ROOM4
ROOM5
ROOM6
ROOM7
STAGE1
STAGE2
STAGE3
STAGE4
PLATE1
PLATE2
PLATE3
ER1
ER2
GATE REVERB Simulation of a gated reverb
REVERS GATE
KARAOKE1
KARAOKE2 Echo for karaoke
KARAOKE3
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
CHORUS4
CHORUS5
CHORUS6
CHORUS7
CHORUS8
CELESTE1
CELESTE2
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3
FLANGER4
FLANGER5
SYMPHONIC1
SYMPHONIC2
PHASER1
PHASER2
EP PHASER1
EP PHASER2
Cyclical wah effects; useful for electric
guitar sounds, etc.
Effect Type Lists
Concert hall reverb effects
Standard chorus effects that add
natural spaciousness to the sound
Early reflection components of the
reverb effect
Simulated steel plate reverb effects
Reverb appropriate for a solo instru-
ment
Small room reverb effects
Modulation effects reminiscent of a jet
airplane taking off and landing
Multi-stage versions of the modulation
provided by a celeste-type effect
Modulation effects that simulate rotary
speakers
Cyclical volume modulation effects
Effects that cyclically move the sound
from right to left and front to back
162
Effects that add distortion with an
edge to the sound; useful for electric
guitar sounds, etc.
Type Description
Simulation of a gated reverb played
back in reverse
Modulation effect created by cyclical
phase shifting
Tremolo effect that is suitable for
guitar sounds
Three delay sounds: L (left), R (right),
and C (center)
L and R delays with two feedback
delays
L and R delays with independent
feedback for L and R
Two delays (L and R) with crossed
feedback
Equalizer effect that simulates sound
heard over the phone
An effect which uses a 3-phase LFO
to add modulation and spaciousness
Adds mild distortion. A noise gate is provided,
making this suitable for use with A/D input as well.
Cyclical volume modulation effects
Stereo EQ with low and high
equalization. Ideal for the drum part.
165
CVP-202
This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as selection of a style
or Music Database setup) that cannot be performed during playback.
Stop song playback, or exit the Song Play mode, then perform the operation again.
This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as copying or deletion
of song data) that cannot be performed in the Song Record mode.
Stop recording, or exit the Song Record mode, then perform the operation again.
A button that does not have a function in the current mode has been pressed.
This prompt appears when you press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button (page 21).
Press the panel button that corresponds to the settings you want to display. (Be
sure to press the second button while this message is showing.)
This message appears if you press [DIRECT ACCESS] followed by a panel button that
does not correspond to a Direct Access display. (See page 21.)
Press [DIRECT ACCESS] again, then press a panel button that corresponds to a
Direct Access display.
This message appears when you try to perform an operation (such as song data conver-
sion) that cannot be performed during recording or playback.
Stop song recording or playback, or exit the Song Record or Song Play mode, then
perform the operation again.
This prompt appears when there is no disk in the disk drive.
Put the proper disk in the drive and attempt the operation again.
This prompt appears when you attempt to rename or convert a song that doesn’t contain
any data.
Select a song that contains data, or insert a disk with song data into the floppy disk
drive.
This message appears when you attempt to load, rename, or delete a file, and no file of
the specified type can be found on the disk in the disk drive.
Create a file or insert a disk with a proper file.
This message appears if you try to save a custom style to disk (page 82), but have se-
lected a memory number that doesn’t contain any style data.
Create a custom style, or select a memory number that contains custom style data.
This message appears when a new or improperly formatted disk has been inserted into
the disk drive. (See page 111.)
Press OK if you want to format the disk. Press CANCEL if you want to abort the
formatting process.
This message appears when you attempt to record or perform other file operations using a
disk whose write-protect tab is in the “protect” position.
Set the write-protect tab to the “write-enable” position (page 112), then try the opera-
tion again. If the operation still cannot be performed, the disk itself has internal write
protection, making it impossible to perform recording or file operations on the disk.
Messages
General (Panel Operation)
General (Direct Access)
General (Disk-related)
163
CVP-202
166
An error occurred while writing to (as in recording or storing files) or reading from the disk.
Try the operation again after pressing the OK button. If the error occurs a second
time, the disk or the disk drive unit may be faulty. If you suspect the drive to be at
fault, refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer.
This message appears when you attempt to record over parts or perform other operations
on song files that are incompatible or do not allow such operations. Depending on the
song file type, operations such as additional recording, copying, deleting, etc. may not be
possible using the CVP-202.
This appears for a few seconds when a time-consuming operation such as Format, Song
Copy, etc., is finished.
This message is displayed while data is being transferred between the Clavinova and the
disk.
The message disappears automatically when the operation is finished.
When operations such as Song Delete or Format are selected, this prompts you to confirm
whether you want to go ahead with the operation or not.
Press YES to execute the operation. Press NO to return to the previous display.
The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold any more data.
Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary data in the disk (page 144), or
use a disk that has more available space. If this message appears during song
recording, recording will stop and any data recorded up to that point will be saved
automatically.
This message appears when you try to create more files than the disk is capable of stor-
ing. You can record up to 60 song files on a 2DD or 2HD disk. A 2DD disk can hold about
107 files (of various types), and a 2HD disk can hold up to about 219 files.
Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary files from the disk (page 144),
or use a disk that has more available space.
A file with the same name already exists.
Press the OK button if you wish to overwrite the original file with new data, or press
CANCEL to abort the operation.
This message appears when you try to execute other operations while reading data from
the disk or saving data.
Wait until the data read/write operation is completed, then perform the operation
again.
General (Memory-related)
This message appears when the Clavinova’s memory has become full while recording a
song in the internal memory (page 133). If this happens, recording will stop and any data
recorded up to that point will be saved automatically.
This message is also displayed if the Clavinova’s memory becomes full when recording
data in a custom style (see page 84).
Messages
164
This message appears when you attempt to record over or edit the data of commercially
available software or data recorded on instruments other than the CVP-202.
Press YES to convert the data for recording or editing on the CVP-202. Press NO if
you don’t want to convert the data.
It may not be possible to record to tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 of songs con-
verted in this manner.
This message appears while the Clavinova is storing the data of a song recorded to the
internal memory after it has been edited using the Track Edit or Initial Edit functions.
Complete the data write operation, then perform the other operation.
167
CVP-202
Custom Style Mode
This message appears when you execute an operation, such as playback of disk software,
that will cause the Clavinova to delete data recorded to the internal memory.
Press YES to delete the data recorded to the internal memory, then perform the
desired operation. Press the NO button if you want to keep the data.
This message appears if you try to select one of the following functions while editing song
data that has been recorded to the internal memory: Chord Sequence (page 121), Setup
Memory (126), or Song Name (page 127).
Use the Song Copy function (page 142) to copy the song to a disk, delete the CVP
MEMORY song (page 144), then perform the desired operation using the data on
the disk.
This message appears for a few seconds when the Custom Style mode is engaged.
(See page 74.)
This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the time signature of the
custom style. (See page 75.)
This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the number of measures in
a section of the custom style. (See page 75.)
This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to perform an operation that can only
be performed after the part has been deleted. (See page 76.)
This confirmation prompt appears when you store a custom style (page 79). It also ap-
pears if you try to change styles before you’ve stored the custom style (page 85).
Select OK to store the custom style. Press CANCEL to return to the previous dis-
play without storing data.
This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to exit the Custom Style mode before
storing the custom style. (See page 85.)
Select YES to store the custom style. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CAN-
CEL to return to the previous display.
This message appears when the previous version of the custom style cannot be recalled
because the time signature has been changed. (See page 80.)
If you attempt to save a custom style to disk before storing it in memory, this message
prompts you to store the style before proceeding. (See page 83.)
This message appears if there is not enough internal memory capacity available to store
the custom style. (See page 84.)
This message appears if the style selected for deletion in the display shown above is the
source style on which the style currently being edited was based.
Press OK to return to the preceding display, and select a different style for deletion.
This message appears when DELETE is selected in the display shown above.
Select the style to be deleted and press the OK button. Press CANCEL if you do
not want to delete the style.
Messages
165
CVP-202
168
Song Copy & Disk Copy
This message appears before you start a Song Copy or Disk Copy operation to inform you
of the number of times the disks must be exchanged. (See page 143.)
This message prompts you to insert the destination disk when copying data from one disk
to another. (See page 143.)
This message appears when you try to copy data from a 2DD disk to a 2HD disk — or vice
versa — using the Disk Copy function (page 142).
Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then perform the operation again from the
beginning. Make sure the destination disk you insert is the same type (2DD or
2HD) as the source disk being copied.
This message appears if you insert the source disk when prompted to insert the destina-
tion disk while using the Disk Copy function (page 143) to copy data from one disk to an-
other.
Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again
from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful
not to confuse the source and destination disks.
Style File Load
This message appears if you attempt to load a Style file when the memory capacity is not
sufficient to hold the specified file. (See page 87.)
Some Style files are too large to be handled by the LISTEN function. (See page 87.)
Load the Style file, then use the normal playback methods to hear the style in
question.
Chord Sequence
This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Chord Sequence function
while recording.
Press YES to store the recorded data. Press NO to exit without storing. Press CAN-
CEL to return to the Chord Sequence function without storing.
This message appears during Chord Sequence recording when you attempt to enter an
accompaniment style or section change at a position other than the beginning of a meas-
ure.
Record the style or section change in question at the beginning of the measure.
(See page 122.)
Other Record Edit
This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Initial Edit function without
writing the data to disk.
Press YES to save the edited data. Press NO to exit without saving. Press CANCEL
to return to the Initial Edit display without saving.
This confirmation prompt appears when you execute the Setup Memory function (page
126) to save the current panel settings with the song being edited in Song Record mode.
Select YES to save the panel settings. Press CANCEL to return to the RECORD
EDIT 2 display without saving.
Messages
166
169
CVP-202
Hardware-related
Song Data Conversion
When you first insert the destination disk while copying a song from one disk to another
disk, this message prompts you to specify the song number to which the song is to be
copied. (See page 143.)
This message prompts you to insert the source disk when copying data from one disk to
another. (See page 143.)
This message is displayed if you insert a disk other than the specified disk (source or
destination) when prompted to exchange disks while using the Disk Copy function (page
143) to copy data from one disk to another.
Press OK to cancel the copy operation, then execute the Disk Copy function again
from the beginning. When exchanging disks during the copy operation, be careful
to insert the correct disk as specified.
This message indicates that you have selected the same song number as both the source
and the destination when copying a song within a disk. (See sidebar, page 143.)
Change the destination song number.
This message appears if you attempt to convert song data that has been saved on a 2HD
disk. (See page 145.)
Press OK and copy the song data to be converted to a 2DD disk, then perform the
data conversion using the 2DD disk.
Following conversion of the song data, this message displays the song number to which
the data was saved.
This message appears when the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is
not properly connected, the HOST SELECT switch is not in the proper position, or the
MIDI driver or MIDI application is not active.
Turn off both the Clavinova and the host computer. Check the cable connection and
the position of the HOST SELECT switch (page 160), then turn on the computer
first, followed by the Clavinova.
The Clavinova will retain data protected by the Backup function (page 152) as long as it is
used regularly. If the instrument is not turned on for a week or longer, however, the data
may be lost. This message appears when the Clavinova is turned on after data has been
lost. It also appears when you recall all factory data (page 153.)
Messages
168
CVP-202
170
Problem
The Clavinova does not turn on.
A click or pop is heard when the
power is turned on or off.
Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s
speakers.
The display is too bright or too dark
to read.
The keyboard volume is low com-
pared to that of the Auto Accompa-
niment or song playback.
The volume of the Auto Accompa-
niment or song playback is low
compared to that of the keyboard.
The overall volume is low, or no
sound is heard.
The damper pedal has no effect, or
the sound continuously sustains
even when the damper pedal is not
pressed.
Style or song playback does not
start.
When the keyboard is played, not
all of the notes sound.
Solution
Securely insert the female plug into
the socket on the Clavinova, and the
male plug into a proper AC outlet.
This is normal, and is no cause for
concern.
Turn off the mobile phone, or use it
further away from the Clavinova.
Adjust the contrast of the display
using the [CONTRAST] control.
(See page 11.)
Increase the overall keyboard level in
the main display (page 23), or use the
VOLUME function in the appropriate
KEYBOARD display (pages 32, 34,
or 37) to raise the volume of the key-
board part in question.
Raise the [ACMP/SONG VOL-
UME] level.
Raise the part or track level(s) in the
appropriate MIXER display (page
65 or 100).
Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level.
Unplug the headphones.
Turn the Local Control function on.
(See page 147.)
Securely insert the pedal cord plug
into the proper jack. (See page 34
in the Data List.)
Set the MIDI Sync function to INT.
(See page 148.)
Since the configuration of the tone
generation system is such that later
notes have priority, previous notes
may occasionally be cut off. (See
“Specifications” in the Data List for
details about the simultaneous
polyphonic capacity.)
Cause
The Clavinova has not been plugged
in properly.
Electrical current is being applied to
the instrument.
The noise may be due to interference
caused by the use of a mobile phone
in close proximity to the Clavinova.
The brightness may be affected by
the surrounding temperature.
Either the overall keyboard volume
or the independent volume level of
the keyboard part is set too low.
The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] is
set too low.
The volume level of one or more
accompaniment parts or song tracks
is set too low.
The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low.
Headphones are connected.
The Local Control function is turned off.
The pedal cord plug is not connected.
The MIDI Sync function is set to EXT.
The Clavinova’s total simultaneous
polyphonic capacity (maximum
number of notes) has been exceeded.
Troubleshooting
168
171
CVP-202
The Auto Accompaniment does not
play back.
The desired chord is not recognized
or output by the Auto Accompani-
ment.
The maximum of 60 songs cannot
be recorded.
Some tracks do not play back when
playing back data.
The Auto Accompaniment is not
turned on.
The keys are not being played cor-
rectly.
The keys are not being played ac-
cording to the selected accompani-
ment mode.
The memory capacity is full because
the playing time of one or more
songs is long, or many functions
were used.
Playback of the track(s) is turned off.
Press the [ACMP ON] button to
turn on the Auto Accompaniment.
Refer to the Fingering Chart (page
12 of the Data List).
Check the accompaniment mode,
and play the keys according to the
selected mode. (See page 59.)
Delete unnecessary songs (page
144) or record to a new disk.
Turn on playback for the tracks that
you want to hear. (See pages 97 and
100.)
Problem SolutionCause
Troubleshooting
169
CVP-202
172
MIDI and Data Compatibility
MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a worldwide
standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible
musical instruments and equipment to share musical information
and control one another.
Depending on the MIDI device, the transmittable/receivable data
differs, and only data which is commonly recognized among the
connected MIDI devices can be transmitted or received. You can
check whether your instrument supports certain data types by
referring to the MIDI Implementation Chart in the owner’s
manual for that instrument. The MIDI Implementation Chart for
the CVP-202 is found on page 30 in the Data List.
MIDI Terminals
Sequence Format
The system which records song data is called “sequence format.
Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the
disk matches that of the MIDI device.
[Common Sequence Formats]
SMF (Standard MIDI File)
This is the most common sequence format.
Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two
types: Format 0 or Format 1.
Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most
commercially available software is recorded as Format 0.
The CVP-202 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format
1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of 17 chunks).
Song data recorded on the CVP-202 is automatically re-
corded as SMF Format 0.
ESEQ
This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s
MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments.
This is a common format used with various Yamaha software.
The CVP-202 is compatible with ESEQ.
Voice Allocation Format
With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called
“program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice
allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.
Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allo-
cation format of the song data matches that of the compat-
ible MIDI device used for playback.
[Main Voice Allocation Formats]
GM System Level 1
This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.
Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level
1, as is most commercially available software.
The CVP-202 is compatible with GM System Level 1.
XG
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format,
and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more
voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over
voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into
the future.
The CVP-202 is compatible with XG.
Song data recorded on the CVP-202 using voices in the
[XG] category is XG-compatible.
DOC
This voice allocation format is compatible with many of
Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instru-
ments.
This is also a common format used with various Yamaha soft-
ware.
The CVP-202 is compatible with DOC.
Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions
above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depend-
ing on the specifications of the devices and particular data re-
cording methods.
MIDI Cable
Connect MIDI devices with special MIDI cables.
MIDI settings can be made in the MIDI pages of the Func-
tion mode display. (See pages 147 through 150.)
Further information on MIDI and its applications is available
in various music books and magazines.
Data Compatibility
This section covers basic information on data compatibility:
whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded
by CVP-202, and whether or not the CVP-202 can playback com-
mercially available song data or song data created for other instru-
ments or on a computer.
Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may
be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have
to perform some special operations before the data can be played
back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the
information below.
Basic Check Points
The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the
items below.
• Disk Format
• Sequence format
Voice allocation format
Disk format
Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with
various devices, including computers. Different devices have
different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first
configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used.
This operation is called “formatting.
There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided,
double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density),
and each type has different formatting systems.
CVP-202 can record and playback with both types of floppy
disks.
When formatted by the CVP-202, a 2DD disk stores up to
720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to 1.44 MB
(megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44 MB” indi-
cate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indi-
cate the format type of disk.)
Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used
is compatible with the format of the disk.
This terminal transmits the MIDI data.
This terminal
receives the MIDI
data.
IN
OUT
THRU
MIDI
Data received via the
MIDI IN terminal is re-
transmitted unchanged
through this terminal.
170
173
CVP-202
Index
A
Accompaniment Mode .................... 57, 59-61
accompaniment styles ................ see styles
All Setup files .................................... 139-141
audio connections ............................. 158-159
Auto Accompaniment ............................ 57-72
B
Backup ..................................................... 152
basic settings ............................................. 19
beat ................................................. 26, 74-75
C
channels, MIDI .......................... 147, 150-151
Chord Assistance .................................. 62-64
chord indication ..................................... 60-61
Chord Sequence ............................... 121-125
chorus ................................................... 44-45
chorus, Custom Style ............................ 81-82
chorus, Song ..................................... 100-101
Chorus Type List ...................................... 163
computer ........................................... 160-161
contrast ...................................................... 11
controls ................................................. 12-13
convert, song data ................................... 145
Custom Style ......................................... 73-88
CVP MEMORY (song) ............................. 133
D
damper pedal ..................................... 40, 138
data dial ..................................................... 17
deleting, Chord Sequence ....................... 124
deleting, data files .................................... 141
deleting, Style Files .................................... 83
deleting, tracks ......................................... 129
Demo Play ............................................ 14-15
detune ........................................................ 35
Direct Access ............................................. 22
Disk Copy .......................................... 142-143
disk drive ...................................................... 9
Disk Format ...................................... 111, 146
Disk functions .................................... 139-146
display pages ............................................. 19
Dual ....................................................... 33-35
E
Easy Play ......................................... 105, 107
Effect Type List ........................................ 164
effects ................................................... 46-48
effects, Song ..................................... 100-101
end mark .......................................... 124, 125
ending pattern ....................................... 55-56
F
Fade In ....................................................... 55
Fade Out .................................................... 56
fast forward .............................................. 103
file icons ..................................................... 94
fill-in patterns .........................................51-52
filter, MIDI Filter ................................. 148-150
fingering (chords) ...................... 60-61, 62-64
Fixed Velocity ........................................... 137
floppy disks .................................................. 9
formatting, Disk ................................ 111, 146
free tempo .................................................. 96
Function ............................................134-135
function, resetting ..................................19-20
functions in normal rectangles ..............20-21
functions in rounded rectangles ................. 16
G
Glide Range ............................................. 138
Guide .......................................... 15, 105-109
guide lamps .............................................. 109
Guide Mode ............................................. 108
H
Harmony ............................................... 69-71
headphone hanger ..................................... 11
headphones ....................................... 11, 158
Help .......................................................27-28
host computer ...................................160-161
highlighted items ........................................ 16
I
Initial Edit .......................................... 130-132
introduction pattern .................................... 54
K
key cover .................................................... 10
Key Touch ................................................ 137
keyboard guide lamps .............................. 109
keyboard percussion .................................. 31
L
LCD, changing a value ............................... 17
LCD, selecting a function ........................... 16
Left Pedal ................................................. 138
left voice ................................................ 36-39
loading, data files ..................................... 140
loading, style files ..................................86-88
Local Control ............................................ 147
lyrics ................................................... 15, 109
M
main display ............................................... 16
main voice ................................. 29-32, 33, 36
memory, recording to ............................... 133
menu display .............................................. 18
messages .......................................... 165-169
messages, Custom Style ...................... 84-85
metronome ............................................ 25-26
Micro Tuning ..................................... 154-155
MIDI equipment ........................................ 160
MIDI Filter ......................................... 148-149
MIDI functions ................................... 147-151
MIDI terminals .......................................... 160
MIDI Transpose ....................................... 150
Mixer, Auto Accompaniment ................. 65-66
Mixer, Song ....................................... 100-101
multi-track recording ......................... 115-118
Music Database .................................... 67-68
music rest ................................................... 10
N
naming, Custom Style ........................... 78-79
naming, data files ..................................... 141
naming, Song ........................................... 127
Next Note ......................................... 105, 107
O
octave ............................................ 32, 34, 38
One Touch Setting ..................................... 72
P
pages, display ............................................ 19
pan ................................................. 32, 35, 38
pan, Custom Style ................................. 81-82
pan, Song .......................................... 100-101
panel controls ........................................ 12-13
part, recording ....................................... 76-78
part, track assignment ........................... 98-99
Part Cancel ........................................... 97-98
part levels .................................. 65-66, 81-82
pause ....................................................... 103
Pedal functions ........................................ 138
pedals .................................................. 38, 40
Pianist styles ........................................ 49, 58
Piano Roll ................................. 106, 107, 109
playback, Auto Accompaniment ...... 58, 60-61
playback, Custom Style ............................. 84
Playback, demo songs .......................... 14-15
playback, Song ................................... 93-104
playback, styles ..................................... 51-56
playback, style files .................................... 88
power ......................................................... 11
practicing ........................................... 105-107
preset scale ....................................... 155-156
Punch-in/out Recording .................... 118-120
171
CVP-202
174
Q
quantizing ....................................78, 129-130
Quick Recording ............................... 112-115
R
Recall ....................................................... 153
Recall Section ............................................ 80
recalling, registration ............................. 90-91
Receive Filter ....................................149-150
Record Edit functions ........................ 126-132
recording, Chord Sequence ..............121-125
recording, Custom Style ........................73-80
recording, Song ................................. 110-120
recording, without a disk .......................... 133
Registration ........................................... 89-92
Registration file .................................139-141
Registration Freeze ...............................91-92
Remote Keyboard .................................... 151
Repeat .............................................. 101-103
Reverb .................................................. 41-43
reverb, Custom Style ............................ 81-82
reverb, Song ..................................... 100-101
Reverb Type List ...................................... 163
rewind ...................................................... 103
Rhythm On/Off ......................................... 125
S
saving, Custom Style ............................82-83
saving, data files ...............................140-141
saving, Initial Edit ..................................... 132
Scale Tuning .....................................155-157
second voice .........................................33-35
section .............................................74-75, 80
Send Channel ...........................147, 150-151
Setup files .........................................139-141
Setup Memory ...................................126-127
setup procedure ......................................... 10
soft pedal ........................................... 40, 138
software ................................................... 104
song, Chord Sequence .....................121-125
Song Copy ........................................142-143
Song Data Transform ............................... 145
Song Delete ............................................. 144
Song Name .............................................. 127
Song Play ............................................93-104
Song Record .....................................110-120
Song Transmission .................................. 151
sostenuto pedal .......................................... 40
Sound Repeat .......................... 106, 107, 109
Split .......................................................36-39
Split Point ....................................... 36, 39, 64
stereo position ................................. see pan
storing, Custom Style ............................ 79-80
storing, Registration ..............................89-90
Style Clear ................................................. 80
style file ................................................. 86-88
styles, custom ....................................... 73-88
styles, playback ..................................... 51-56
styles, selecting ..................................... 49-50
Synchronization (MIDI) ............................ 148
Synchronized Start ..................................... 53
Synchronized Stop ..................................... 62
T
Tap Start .................................................... 53
tempo ........................................... 25, 96, 100
terminals and jacks ............................... 12-13
time signature ................................. 26, 74-75
Track Delete ............................................. 129
Track Edit .......................................... 128-130
Track Mix ................................................. 128
Track Recording ................................ 115-118
Track Quantize .................................. 129-130
tracks, adding ........................................... 118
tracks, song structure ............................... 110
Transform ................................................. 145
Transpose ........................................ 136, 150
troubleshooting ................................. 170-171
Tune ................................................. 136, 156
U
user scale .......................................... 156-157
V
velocity ..................................................... 137
Voice Setting ............................................ 137
voices, selecting ........................29-30, 76, 99
volume .................................................. 23-24
volume, metromome .................................. 26
volume, part .............................. 65-66, 81-82
volume, song .............................................. 99
volume, track ..................................... 100-101
volume, voices ............................... 32, 34, 37
Index
172
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted
by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class B
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio
frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instruc-
tions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful
to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC
regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in
all installations. If this product is found to be the source of inter-
ference, which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and
ON, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker
or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the an-
tenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type
of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Divi-
sion, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed
by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(class B)
This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-
dance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals
in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-
nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of
the three pin plug.
(2 wires)
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES,
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU
FOND.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.
(polarity)
173
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic prod-
uct, basic precautions should always be followed. These pre-
cautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions,
Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions
found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, in-
cluding connection to the main supply.
2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area
where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt
exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact
your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable)
instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the
name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic
found in the Special Message Section of this manual.
3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug
(one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the
plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the
problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete
outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
4. Some electronic products utilize external power sup-
plies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any
power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners
manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by
Yamaha.
5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other
objects on the power cord or place it in a position where any-
one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or
connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is
not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the
minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE:
The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling
capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electri-
cian.
6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically
designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in loca-
tions that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instruc-
tions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be
assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.
7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products
should be installed in locations that do not significantly con-
tribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this prod-
uct close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and
other devices that produce heat should be avoided.
8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-
tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam-
ples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub,
sink, or wet basement.
9. This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the
manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all
safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from
the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for ex-
tended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when
there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm
activity.
11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are
not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.
12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a
qualified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
c. The product has been exposed to rain: or
d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change
in performance; or
e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
product has been damaged.
13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that de-
scribed in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-
fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT
operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or
ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-
sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the
product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are de-
signed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that
benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are
well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are
designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-2
174
__
__
__
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous gurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.
Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha de Panamá S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Nederland
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Belgium
Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,
Belgium
Tel: 02-726 6032
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France, S.A.
Division Professionnelle
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-201-0700
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofce
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk lial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacic Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0661
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-703-0900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,
Singapore
Tel: 65-747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,
Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,
Bangkok 10320, Thailand
Tel: 02-641-2951
THE PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacic Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacic Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE
Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
[CL] 26
M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2003 Yamaha Corporation
WA54840 3??PO???.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia
Clavinova Web site (English only)
http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128
  • Page 129 129
  • Page 130 130
  • Page 131 131
  • Page 132 132
  • Page 133 133
  • Page 134 134
  • Page 135 135
  • Page 136 136
  • Page 137 137
  • Page 138 138
  • Page 139 139
  • Page 140 140
  • Page 141 141
  • Page 142 142
  • Page 143 143
  • Page 144 144
  • Page 145 145
  • Page 146 146
  • Page 147 147
  • Page 148 148
  • Page 149 149
  • Page 150 150
  • Page 151 151
  • Page 152 152
  • Page 153 153
  • Page 154 154
  • Page 155 155
  • Page 156 156
  • Page 157 157
  • Page 158 158
  • Page 159 159
  • Page 160 160
  • Page 161 161
  • Page 162 162
  • Page 163 163
  • Page 164 164
  • Page 165 165
  • Page 166 166
  • Page 167 167
  • Page 168 168
  • Page 169 169
  • Page 170 170
  • Page 171 171
  • Page 172 172
  • Page 173 173
  • Page 174 174
  • Page 175 175
  • Page 176 176
  • Page 177 177
  • Page 178 178

Yamaha Clavinova CVP-202 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Pianos digitales
Tipo
El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para